Você está na página 1de 734

Preface, Contents

1
General Technical Specifications
2
Racks
SIMATIC 3
Power Supply Modules
Central Processing Units for the 4
S7-400
S7-400, M7-400 Programmable 5
Controllers Digital Modules
Module Specifications 6
Analog Modules
7
Interface Modules
Reference Manual
8
IM 463-2
PROFIBUS DP Master Interface 9
IM 467/IM 467 FO
10
Memory Cards
Cable Duct and Fan 11
Subassemblies
12
RS 485 Repeater
13
CPUs for M7-400
14
M7-400 Expansions
15
Interface Submodules
Cycle and Reaction Times of the 16
S7-400
16
This manual is part of the documentation Appendices
package with the order number
6ES7 498-8AA03-8BA0 Glossary, Index

Edition 06/2001
A5E00069467-04
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices intended to ensure personal safety, as well as to protect the products and
connected equipment against damage. These notices are highlighted by the symbols shown below and
graded according to severity by the following texts:

Danger
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions
are not taken.

Warning
! indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper
precautions are not taken.

Caution
! indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

Notice
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a
particular part of the documentation.

Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are
defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground and to tag circuits, equipment, and
systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Correct Usage
Note the following:

Warning
! This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the
technical description, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which
have been approved or recommended by Siemens.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed
correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.

Trademarks
SIMATIC, SIMATIC HMI and SIMATIC NET are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG.
Third parties using for their own purposes any other names in this document which refer to trademarks
might infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners.

Copyright W Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved Disclaim of Liability


The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement
contents is not permitted without express written authority. with the hardware and software described. Since deviations
Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed
design, are reserved. regularly and any necessary corrections included in
subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are
Siemens AG welcomed.
Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik
Geschaeftsgebiet Industrie-Automatisierungssysteme Siemens AG 2001
Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Technical data subject to change.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft A5E00069467-04
Preface

Purpose of the Manual


The manual contains reference information on operator actions, descriptions of
functions and technical specifications of the central processing units, power supply
modules and interface modules of the S7-400.
How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-400 or M7-400
system is described in the installation manuals for each system.

Knowledge Required
You will need general knowledge of automation to understand this manual.

Scope of Validity of the Manual


The manual is valid for the S7-400 programmable controller.

Changes Compared with the Previous Version


Since the previous version of the Module Specifications reference manual, the
following changes have been made:
Chapters 4 Central Processing Units for the S7-400, 5 Digital Modules, 6
Analog Modules and Appendix A Parameter Sets for Signal Modules have
been comprehensively revised
Appendix B Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules is new
The list of abbreviations and the glossary at the end of the manual are new
Note: The previous version of this Module Specifications reference manual can
be recognized by the number in the footer: A5E00069467-03.
The current number is: A5E00069467-04.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 iii
Preface

Certification, Standards and Approvals


The SIMATIC S7-400 product range complies with the following rule specifications:
The 73/23/EEC EU directive on low voltage
89/336/EEC EU directive on electromagnetic compatibility
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: UL 508 registered (Industrial Control
Equipment)
Canadian Standards Association: CSA C22.2 Number 142, tested (Process
Control Equipment)
Factory Mutual Research: FM Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D
potentially explosive areas, T4A and Class I, Zone 2, IIC, T4.

Standards and Approvals


The S7-400 meets the requirements and criteria of IEC 61131, Part 2. The S7-400
satisfies the requirements of the CE Mark. The approbations for CSA, UL and FM
are available for the S7-400.
Details on the approbations and standards are given in Section 1.1.

How the Manual Fits in


This manual forms part of the S7-400, M7-400 documentation.

System Documentation Package


S7-400/M7-400 S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers; Hardware and
Installation
S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers; Module Specifications
S7-400 Instruction List

Navigation
To help you find special information quickly, the manual contains the following
access aids:
At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of
the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual.
An overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left column on
each page of each chapter.
You will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual. The glossary
contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual.
At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you
rapid access to the information you need.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


iv A5E00069467-04
Preface

Further Support
Please contact your local Siemens representative if you have any queries about
the products described in this manual.
http://www.ad.siemens.de/partner

Training Center
We offer a range of suitable courses to help you to get started with the
SIMATIC S7 programmable controller. Please contact your local training center or
the central training center in Nuremberg, D-90327, Germany:
Phone: +49 (911) 895-3200.
http://www.sitrain.com

SIMATIC Documentation in the Internet


You can obtain documentation free of charge in the Internet at:
http://www.ad.siemens.de/support
Use the Knowledge Manager there to find the documentation you require
quickly. You can use the documentation conference in the Internet forum for any
questions or suggestions you may have.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 v
Preface

Automation and Drives, Service & Support


Contact at any time of the day throughout the world:

Nuremberg
Johnson City

Singapore

SIMATIC Hotline

Worldwide (Nuremberg) Worldwide (Nuremberg)


Technical Support Technical Support
(FreeContact) (subject to charge, with SIMATIC Card
only)
Local time: Local time:
Mon. through Fri. 7 AM to 5 PM Mon. through Fri. 0 AM to 12 PM
Phone: +49 (180) 5050-222 Phone: +49 (911) 895-7777
Fax: +49 (180) 5050-223 Fax: +49 (911) 895-7001
E-mail: techsupport@
ad.siemens.de
GMT: +1:00 GMT: +01:00
Europe / Africa (Nuremberg) America (Johnson City) Asia and Australia (Singapore)
Authorization Technical Support and Technical Support and
Authorization Authorization
Local time: Local time: Local time:
Mon. through Fri. 7 AM to 5 PM Mon. through Fri. 8 AM to 7 PM Mon. through Fri. 8.30 AM to 5.30 PM
Phone: +49 (911) 895-7200 Phone: +1 423 262-2522 Phone: +65 740-7000
Fax: +49 (911) 895-7201 Fax: +1 423 262-2289 Fax: +65 740-7001
E-mail: authorization@ E-mail: simatic.hotline@ E-mail: simatic.hotline@
nbgm.siemens.de sea.siemens.com sae.siemens.com.sg
GMT: +1:00 GMT: 5:00 GMT: +8:00
The languages spoken on the SIMATIC Hotlines are normally English and German; on the Authorization Hotline, French,
Italian and Spanish are also spoken.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


vi A5E00069467-04
Preface

Service & Support on the Internet


In addition to our documentation, we also offer you the benefit of all our knowledge
in the Internet.
http://www.ad.siemens.de/support
There you will find:
Current product information, FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), downloads,
tips and tricks.
The newsletter will update you on the latest information on your products.
The Knowledge Manager will find the right documents for you.
You can discuss your experiences with other users and specialists throughout
the world in the forum.
You can find your local point of contact for Automation & Drives in our Contacts
database
There is loads of information on local services, repairs, spare parts and much
more under the heading Service.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 vii
Preface

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


viii A5E00069467-04
Contents

Preface
Contents
1 General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Standards and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries . . . . 1-8
1.4 Mechanical and Ambient Climatic Conditions for Operating
the S7-400/M7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and
Degree of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
2 Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1 Function and Structure of the Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 The Racks UR1; (6ES7 400-1TA01-0AA0) and UR2;
(6ES7 400-1JA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 The Rack UR2-H; (6ES7 400-2JA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.4 The Rack CR2; (6ES7 401-2TA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.5 The Racks ER1; (6ES7 403-1TA01-0AA0) and ER2;
(6ES7 403-1JA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
3 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Redundant Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3 Backup Battery (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4 Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.5 Fault/Error Messages via LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.6 Power Supply Module PS 407 4A; (6ES7 407-0DA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.7 Power Supply Module PS 407 4A;
(6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.8 Power Supply Modules
PS 407 10A; (6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0) and
PS 407 10A R; (6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3.9 Power Supply Module PS 407 20A; (6ES7 407-0RA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3.10 Power Supply Module PS 407 20A; (6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . 3-24

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 ix
Contents

3.11 Power Supply Module PS 405 4A; (6ES7 405-0DA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . 3-26


3.12 Power Supply Module PS 405 4A; (6ES7 405-0DA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3.13 Power Supply Module PS 405 10A; (6ES7 405-0KA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3.14 Power Supply Modules
PS 405 10A; (6ES7 405-0KA01-0AA0) and
PS 405 10A R; (405-0KR00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.15 Power Supply Module PS 405 20A; (6ES7 405-0RA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3.16 Power Supply Module PS 405 20A; (6ES7 405-0RA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . 3-36
4 Central Processing Units for the S7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Controls and Indicators of the CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Overview of the Memory Concept and Startup Options
of the S7-400 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.3 Monitoring Functions of the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.4 Status and Error LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.5 Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.6 Multipoint Interface (MPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.7 PROFIBUS DP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4.8 Overview of the Parameters for the S7-400 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.9 Evaluation of Process Interrupts in the S7-400H System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.10 Multicomputing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.10.1 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4.10.2 Multicomputing Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.10.3 Configuring and Programming Multicomputing Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.11 CPU 41x as DP Master/DP Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.11.1 DP Address Areas of the CPUs 41x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.11.2 CPU 41x as DP Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4.11.3 Diagnostics of the CPU 41x as DP Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4.11.4 CPU 41x as DP Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4.11.5 Diagnostics of the CPU 41x as DP Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4.11.6 Diagnostics Using LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.11.7 Diagnostics with STEP 5 or STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.11.8 Reading Out the Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4.11.9 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4.11.10 Station Statuses 1 to 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4.11.11 Master PROFIBUS Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.11.12 Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4.11.13 Module Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4.11.14 Station Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4.11.15 Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4.12 Direct Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4.13 Diagnostics in Direct Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4.14 Technical Specifications of the CPU 412-1; (6ES7 412-1XF03-0AB0) . . . 4-60

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


x A5E00069467-04
Contents

4.15 Technical Specifications of the CPU 412-2; (6ES7 412-2XG00-0AB0) . . 4-64


4.16 Technical Specifications of the CPU 414-2; (6ES7 414-2XG03-0AB0) . . 4-68
4.17 Technical Specifications of the CPU 414-3; (6ES7 414-3XJ00-0AB0) . . . 4-72
4.18 Technical Specifications of the CPU 414-4H; (6ES7 414-4HJ00-0AB0) . 4-76
4.19 Technical Specifications of the CPU 416-2; (6ES7 416-2XK02-0AB0) . . . 4-80
4.20 Technical Specifications of the CPU 416-3; (6ES7 416-3XL00-0AB0) . . . 4-84
4.21 Technical Specifications of the CPU 417-4; (6ES7 417-4XL00-0AB0) . . . 4-88
4.22 Technical Specifications of the CPU 417-4H; (6ES7 417-4HL01-0AB0) . 4-92
5 Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 5-5
5.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.1 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.2 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.5 Interrupts of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.6 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
5.7 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 24 VDC (6ES7 421-1BL00-0AA0) . 5-17
5.8 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 24 VDC;
(6ES7 421-1BL01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5.9 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 24 VDC;
(6ES7 421-7BH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.9.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.9.2 Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.10 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 120 VAC;
(6ES7 421-5EH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.11 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 24/60 VUC;
(6ES7 421-7DH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.11.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 421; DI 16 24/60 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5.12 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 120/230 VUC;
(6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5.13 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 120/230 VUC;
(6ES7 421-1FH20-0AA0)
............................................................... 5-43
5.14 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 120 VUC;
(6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.15 Digital Output Module SM 422;
DO 16 24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7 422-1BH10-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
5.16 Digital Output Module SM 422;
DO 16 24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7 422-1BH11-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 xi
Contents

5.17 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 20-125 VDC/1.5 A;


(6ES7 422-5EH10-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.17.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . 5-59
5.18 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A;
(6ES7 422-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60
5.19 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A;
(6ES7 422-7BL00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.19.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.19.2 Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
5.20 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 8 120/230 VAC/5 A;
(6ES7 422-1FF00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-68
5.21 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 120/230 VAC/2 A;
(6ES7 422-1FH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
5.22 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 20-120 VAC/2 A;
(6ES7 422-5EH00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.22.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 16 20-120 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . 5-79
5.23 Relay Output Module SM 422; DO 16 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A;
(6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
6 Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6.1 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning
the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.3 Analog Value Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.3.1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.3.2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of
the Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.5 Behavior of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.5.1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.5.2 Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.5.3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules . . . . 6-36
6.7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
6.7.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6.7.2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6.10 Connecting Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
6.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
6.12 Connecting Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
6.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
6.14 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


xii A5E00069467-04
Contents

6.15 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64


6.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
6.17 Analog Module Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
6.18 Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 13 Bit; (6ES7 431-1KF00-0AB0) . . . 6-73
6.18.1 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
6.18.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 13 Bit 6-78
6.19 Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 14 Bit; (6ES7 431-1KF10-0AB0) . . . 6-80
6.19.1 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
6.19.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 14 Bit 6-88
6.20 Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 14 Bit; (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . 6-93
6.20.1 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
6.20.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 14 Bit 6-99
6.21 Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 16 13 Bit; (6ES7 431-0HH00-0AB0) . 6-102
6.21.1 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
6.21.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 13 Bit 6-107
6.22 Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 16 16 Bit; (6ES7 431-7QH00-0AB0) . 6-110
6.22.1 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 16 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
6.22.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 16 Bit 6-120
6.23 Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 RTD 16 Bit;
(6ES7 431-7KF10-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
6.23.1 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 RTD 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130
6.23.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431;
AI 8 RTD 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-134
6.24 Analog Input Module SM 431; AI 8 16 Bit; (6ES7 431-7KF00-0AB0) . . . 6-135
6.24.1 Commissioning the SM 431; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140
6.24.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 16 Bit 6-144
6.25 Analog Output Module SM 432; AO 8 13 Bit; (6ES7 432-1HF00-0AB0) 6-146
6.25.1 Commissioning the SM 432; AO 8 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-150
6.25.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 432; AO 8 13 Bit . . . . . 6-150
7 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Common Features of the Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 The Interface Modules
IM 460-0; (6ES7 460-0AA00-0AB0, 6ES7 460-0AA01-0AB0) and
IM 461-0; (6ES7 461-0AA00-0AA0, 6ES7 461-0AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.3 The Interface Modules
IM 460-1; (6ES7 460-1BA00-0AB0, 6ES7 460-1BA01-0AB0) and
IM 461-1; (6ES7 461-1BA00-0AA0, 6ES7 461-1BA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.4 The Interface Modules
IM 460-3; (6ES7 460-3AA00-0AB0, 6ES7 460-3AA01-0AB0) and
IM 461-3; (6ES7 461-3AA00-0AA0, 6ES7 461-3AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.5 The Interface Modules
IM 460-4; (6ES7 460-4AA01-0AB0) and
IM 461-4; (6ES7 461-4AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 xiii
Contents

8 IM 463-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Using SIMATIC S5 Expansion Units in an S7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Rules for Connecting S5 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 Operator Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.4 Installing and Connecting the IM 463-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.5 Setting the Operating Modes of the IM 314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.6 Configuring S5 Modules for Operation in the S7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.7 Pin Assignments of the 721 Connecting Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.8 Terminating Connector for IM 314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
8.9 Technical Specifications (6ES7 4632AA000AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
9 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467/IM 467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 PROFIBUS DP Master Interface IM 467/IM 467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.1 Indicators and the Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3 Connection to PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.3.1 Bus Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.3.2 Optical Connection to PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.3.3 Connecting a Fiber-Optic Cable to the IM 467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.4 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.4.1 Technical Specifications of the IM 467 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
9.4.2 Technical Specifications of the IM 467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
10 Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
10.1 Design and Function of Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.2 RAM Card and Flash Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
11 Cable Duct and Fan Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
11.1 Fan Monitoring in the Fan Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2 Cable Duct; (6ES7 408-0TA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11.3 The 120/230 VAC Fan Subassembly; (6ES7 408-1TB00-0XA0) . . . . . . . . 11-6
11.4 The 24 VDC Fan Subassembly; (6ES7 408-1TA00-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
12 RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 Application and Characteristics (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
12.4 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
13 CPUs for M7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 Performance Features ........................................ 13-2
13.2 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


xiv A5E00069467-04
Contents

13.3 Function Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4


13.3.1 Status and Fault LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.3.2 Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.3.3 Mode Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.3.4 Submodule Receptacles for Interface Submodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.3.5 Memory Submodules Suitable for the Main Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.3.6 Expansion Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
13.3.7 Multipoint Interface (MPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.4 The BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
13.4.1 BIOS Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13.4.2 BIOS Hot Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
13.4.3 Operator Inputs in the BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
13.4.4 Opening and Exiting the BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13.4.5 Setup Page User Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
13.4.6 Setup Page IF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13.4.7 Setup Page Timeout Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
13.4.8 Setup Page Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
13.4.9 Setup Page Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
13.4.10 Hard Disk Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
13.4.11 Setup Page Floppy/Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
13.4.12 Setup Page Boot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
13.4.13 Setup Page System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
13.5 I/O Addresses, Main Memory and Interrupt Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
14 M7-400 Expansions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2 EXM 478 Expansion Module; (6ES7 478-2AC00-0AC0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.2.1 Addressing the EXM 478 Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7
14.2.2 Interrupt Assignments, Signal Switching EXM 478 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-13
14.2.3 Technical Specifications of the EXM 478 Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
14.3 ATM 478 AT Adapter Module; (6ES7 478-2CA00-0AC0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14.3.1 Pin Assignments of the AT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-16
14.3.2 Technical Specifications of the ATM 478 AT Adapter Module . . . . . . . . . . 14-19
14.4 MSM 478 Mass Storage Module; (6ES7 478-2BA00-0AC0) . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
14.4.1 LPT1 Parallel Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
14.4.2 Technical Specifications of the MSM 478 Mass Storage Module . . . . . . . 14-25
15 Interface Submodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
15.1 Interface Submodules Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.2 Submodule IDs and Insertion Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
15.3 IF 962-VGA Interface Submodule for M7-300/400;
(6ES7 962-1BA00-0AC0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
15.3.1 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
15.3.2 Addressing, Interrupts, and Submodule ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15.3.3 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
15.4 IF 962-COM Interface Submodule for M7-300/400;
(6ES7 962-3AA00-0AC0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
15.4.1 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
15.4.2 Addressing and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 xv
Contents

15.4.3 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16


15.5 IF 962-LPT Interface Submodule for M7-300/400;
(6ES7 962-4AA00-0AC0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
15.5.1 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
15.5.2 Addressing and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
15.5.3 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
15.6 IF 961-DIO Interface Submodule for M7-300/400;
(6ES7 961-1AA00-0AC0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
15.6.1 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-24
15.6.2 Addressing and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
15.6.3 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-30
15.7 IF 961-AIO Interface Submodule for M7-300/400;
(6ES7 961-2AA00-0AC0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32
15.7.1 Pin Assignments and Terminal Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
15.7.2 Connecting Measured Value Sensors to Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-36
15.7.3 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
15.7.4 Conversion Time and Cycle Time of the Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . 15-43
15.7.5 Conversion Time, Cycle Time, Settling Time, and Response Time
of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-44
15.7.6 Starting Up the IF 961-AIO Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-45
15.7.7 Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-45
15.7.8 Analog Output Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46
15.7.9 Analog Input Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47
15.7.10 Analog Value Representation for the Measuring Ranges
of the Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-49
15.7.11 Analog Value Representation for the Measuring Ranges
of the Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50
15.7.12 Diagnostics, Interrupts, and Submodule ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-51
15.7.13 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52
15.8 IF 961-CT1 Interface Submodule for M7-300/400;
(6ES7 961-3AA00-0AC0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-54
15.8.1 What Can the IF961-CT1 Interface Submodule Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-55
15.8.2 Addressing and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57
15.8.3 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-58
15.9 IF 964-DP Interface Submodule for S7-400 and M7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-59
15.9.1 Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-61
15.9.2 Addressing and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-62
15.9.3 Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-63
15.10 Synchronization Submodule for S7-400H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-64
16 Cycle and Reaction Times of the S7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
16.1 Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.2 Cycle Time Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
16.3 Different Cycle Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
16.4 Communication Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16.5 Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
16.6 How Cycle and Reaction Times Are Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


xvi A5E00069467-04
Contents

16.7 Examples of Calculating the Cycle Time and Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . 16-20
16.8 Interrupt Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
16.9 Example of Calculating the Interrupt Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-25
16.10 Reproducibility of Time-Delay and Watchdog Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-26
A Parameter Sets for Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program . A-2
A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
B Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B.1 Evaluating the Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in
the User Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.2 Structure and Contents of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 and 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B.3 Diagnostic Data of the Digital Input Modules as of Byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
B.4 Diagnostic Data of the Digital Output Modules as of Byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B.5 Diagnostic Data of the Analog Input Modules as of Byte 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
C Spare Parts and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
D Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D.1 What is ESD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage . D-4
E List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 xvii
Contents

Figures
2-1 Structure of a Rack with 18 Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 Dimensions of the 18-Slot or 9-Slot Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-3 Dimensions of the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-4 CR2 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-5 ER1 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-6 ER2 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
3-1 Controls and Indicators on the PS 407 20A Power Supply Module . . . . . 3-7
3-2 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3-3 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-4 Controls and Displays of the PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-5 Controls and Displays of the PS 407 20A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-6 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 20 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3-7 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 4 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-8 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 4 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
3-9 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 10 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3-10 Controls and Displays of the PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3-11 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
3-12 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
4-1 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the CPU 412-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the CPU 41x-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-3 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the CPU 41x-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-4 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the CPU 417-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-5 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the CPU 414-4H/417-4H . . . . . . 4-6
4-6 Positions of the Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-7 Multicomputing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-8 Diagnostics with CPU 41x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-9 Diagnostic Addresses for the DP Master and DP Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-10 Intermediate Memory in the CPU 41x as DP Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4-11 Diagnostic Addresses for the DP Master and DP Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-12 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4-13 Structure of the Module Diagnosis of the CPU 41x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4-14 Structure of the Station Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4-15 Bytes +4 to +7 for Diagnostic and Process Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-16 Direct Communication with CPUs 41x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4-17 Diagnostic Address for the Recipient During Direct Communication . . . . 4-58
5-1 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5-2 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 24 VDC 5-18
5-3 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 24 VDC 5-21
5-4 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 24 VDC 5-24
5-5 Terminal Assignment Diagram for the Redundant Supply of Sensors
of the SM 421; DI 16 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5-6 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16 120 VAC . . . . . . . . 5-33
5-7 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421;
DI 16 24/60 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
5-8 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421;
DI 16 120/230 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
5-9 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421;
DI 16 120/230 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5-10 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32 120 VUC 5-47
5-11 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422;
DO 16 24 VDC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


xviii A5E00069467-04
Contents

5-12 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422;


DO 16 24 VDC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
5-13 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422;
DO 16 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5-14 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422;
DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5-15 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422;
DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
5-16 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422;
DO 8 120/230 VAC/5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-69
5-17 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422;
DO 16 120/230 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5-18 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422;
DO 16 20-120 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5-19 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422;
DO 16 30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
6-1 Levering the Measuring Range Module out of the Analog Input Module . 6-30
6-2 Inserting the Measuring Range Module into the Analog Input Module . . . 6-31
6-3 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6-4 Scan Time of an Analog Input or Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6-5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6-6 Settling and Response Times of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6-8 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6-9 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
6-10 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6-11 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
6-12 Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters to an AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6-13 Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters to an SM 431; 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
6-14 Four-Conductor Connection of Resistance Thermometers on an AI . . . . 6-53
6-15 Three-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an AI . . . . . . . . . 6-53
6-16 Two-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an AI . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6-17 Design of Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
6-18 Connection of Thermocouples without Compensation or Using
the Reference Temperature Value to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
6-19 Connection of a Thermocouple with Reference Junction
(Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6-20 Connection of Thermocouples of the Same Type with External
Compensation by Means of a Resistance Thermometer, Connected
to Channel 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
6-21 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over
a Four-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
6-22 Two-Conductor Connection of Loads to a Voltage Output of
an Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
6-23 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
6-24 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Triggered
the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
6-25 Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
6-26 Terminal Assignment Diagram of theSM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
6-27 Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
6-28 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
6-29 Step Response of the SM 431; AI 8 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 xix
Contents

6-30 Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93


6-31 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
6-32 Step Response of the SM 431; AI 8 14 Bit (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0) . . 6-99
6-33 Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
6-34 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
6-35 Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
6-36 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
6-37 Step Response of the SM 431; AI 16 16 Bit (6ES7 431-7QH00-0AB0) . 6-119
6-38 Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-127
6-39 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . 6-128
6-40 Step Response of the SM 431; AI 8 RTD 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-132
6-41 Block Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-136
6-42 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-137
6-43 Step Response at 10 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression
of the SM 431; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142
6-44 Step Response at 50 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression
of the SM 431; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-142
6-45 Step Response at 60 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression
of the SM 431; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143
6-46 Step Response at 400 Hz Interference Frequency Suppression
of the SM 431; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-143
6-47 Block Diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146
6-48 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 432; AO 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . 6-147
7-1 Example: Configuration with Send IMs, Receive IMs and Terminators . . 7-3
7-2 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the
IM 460-0 and IM 461-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-3 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the
IM 460-1 and IM 461-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-4 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the
IM 460-3 and IM 461-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-5 Position of the Operator Controls and Indicators of the
IM 460-4 and IM 461-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
8-1 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the IM 463-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-2 Settings of the IM 314 with Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-3 Connection Variant for CCs and EUs via the IM 463-2 and IM 314 . . . . . 8-11
9-1 Configuration of the IM 467/467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9-2 LEDs of the IM 467/467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9-3 Connecting the Bus Connector to the IM 467 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9-4 Connector Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9-5 Optical Connection to PROFIBUS DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9-6 Installing the Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9-7 Inserting the Fiber-Optic Cables into the IM 467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
10-1 Structure of the Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
11-1 Example of a Message Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11-2 Front View of the Cable Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
11-3 Controls and Indicators of the Fan Subassembly 120/230 VAC
(6ES7 408-1TB00-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
11-4 Controls and Indicators of the Fan Subassembly 24 VDC
(6ES7 408-1TA00-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
12-1 RC Network with 10 MW for Configuration with Ungrounded
Reference Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
12-2 Isolation Between the Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


xx A5E00069467-04
Contents

12-3 Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7


13-1 Front and Rear View of a CPU 486-3 and CPU 488-3
without Covering Flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13-2 Status and Fault LEDs on the CPU 486-3 and CPU 488-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13-3 Mode Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-4 Position of the Receptacles for Interface Submodules
on the CPU 486-3 and CPU 488-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13-5 Submodule Receptacle Numbers on the CPU486-3/CPU488-3
and EXM478 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13-6 POST Window for a CPU 488-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
13-7 Warm Restart Window for a CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
13-8 Context-Sensitive Help Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
13-9 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
13-10 Setup Exit Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
13-11 User Help Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
13-12 IF Modules Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
13-13 Setup Page Timeout Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
13-14 Security Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
13-15 Date and Time Setup Page (Default) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
13-16 Hard Disk Setup Page with only the Master Hard Disk Present . . . . . . . 13-33
13-17 Floppy/Card Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
13-18 Boot Options Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
13-19 System Setup Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
14-1 Positions of Expansion Socket and Expansion Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14-2 Maximum Expansion with Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14-3 EXM 478 Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14-4 Submodule Receptacle Numbers for the FM 456-4 and EXM 478 . . . . . . 14-8
14-5 Submodule Receptacle Numbers for the
CPU 486-3, CPU 488-3, and EXM 478 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
14-6 Base Addresses of the Expansion Modules and the
Interface Submodules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10
14-7 ATM 478 AT Adapter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
14-8 ATM 478 AT Adapter Module, 98-Pin Standard Direct Connector . . . . . . 14-16
14-9 Dimension Specifications for AT Modules to be Installed in an ATM 478 . 14-21
14-10 MSM 478 Mass Storage Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
15-1 IF 962-VGA Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
15-2 X2 Socket, Keyboard Plug Connection IF 961-VGA
(6-Pin Mini DIN Socket Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
15-3 IF 962-COM Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
15-4 IF 962-LPT Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
15-5 IF 961-DIO Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
15-6 X1 Socket Assignments, IF 961-DIO (25-Pin Sub D Connector) . . . . . . . 15-24
15-7 Circuit Block Diagram and Terminal Connection Diagram for Wiring
the Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
15-8 Circuit Block Diagram and Terminal Connection Diagram for Wiring
the Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
15-9 IF 961-AIO Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-32
15-10 X1 Socket Assignments (25-Pin Sub D Connector) and
Terminal Connection Diagram of the IF 961-AIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-33
15-11 Circuit Block Diagram of the IF 961-AIO Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . 15-34
15-12 Grounding the Analog Inputs/Outputs of the Interface
Submodule IF 961-AIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 xxi
Contents

15-13 Connection of Isolated Measured Value Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37


15-14 Connection of Non-Isolated Measured Value Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37
15-15 Connection of Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-38
15-16 Connection of Two-Wire Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
15-17 Connection of Four-Wire Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-39
15-18 Four-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers/Resistances
with One Constant Current Source Each . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
15-19 Four-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers/Resistances
with a Common Constant Current Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-40
15-20 Connecting Loads/Actuators via a Two-Wire Connection
to a Current Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41
15-21 Connecting Loads/Actuators via a Three-Wire Connection
to a Voltage Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-42
15-22 Cycle Time of the Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-43
15-23 Response Time of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-44
15-24 IF 961-CT1 Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-54
15-25 IF 964-DP Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-59
16-1 Parts and Composition of the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3
16-2 Formula for Calculation of the Transfer Time for the Process Image . . . . 16-5
16-3 Different Cycle Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
16-4 Minimum Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
16-5 Formula: Influence of Communication Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16-6 Breakdown of a Time Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
16-7 Dependency of the Cycle Time on the Communication Load . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
16-8 DP Cycle Times on the PROFIBUS-DP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
16-9 Shortest Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
16-10 Longest Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
16-11 Calculating the Interrupt Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
A-1 Data Record 1 of the Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . A-5
A-2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A-3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A-4 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A-5 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . B-4
B-3 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . B-5
B-4 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . B-5
B-5 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC B-6
B-6 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC . B-6
B-7 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC . . . . . . B-7
B-8 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422;
DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
B-9 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422;
DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422;
DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
B-11 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422;
DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B-12 Bytes 4 to 10 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422;
DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11
B-13 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422;
DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


xxii A5E00069467-04
Contents

B-14 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422;


DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
B-15 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 422;
DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13
B-16 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-120 VAC/2 A B-13
B-17 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . B-14
B-18 Bytes 4 to 8 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . B-15
B-19 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . B-15
B-20 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit B-16
B-21 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . B-16
B-22 Even Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit B-17
B-23 Odd Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . B-17
B-24 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . B-18
B-25 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostic Data of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . B-18
B-26 Even Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . B-19
B-27 Odd Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . B-19
D-1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 xxiii
Contents

Tables
1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-2 Products that Fulfill the Requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive . . . . 1-2
1-3 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1-4 Pulse-Shaped Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-5 Sinusoidal Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1-6 Power Supply Modules that Comply with System Perturbation Standards 1-7
1-7 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-8 Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-9 Ambient Mechanical Conditions for the MSM 478 Mass Storage
Module in Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-10 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-11 Ambient Climatic Conditions for the S7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-12 Ambient Climatic Conditions for the M7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-13 Test Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
4-1 LEDs of the CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-2 Positions of the Mode Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-3 Protection Levels of a S7-400 CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-4 CPUs 41x (MPI/DP Interface as PROFIBUS DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-5 CPUs 41x (MPI/DP Interface and DP Module as PROFIBUS DP) . . . . . . 4-31
4-6 Meaning of the BUSF LED of the CPU 41x as DP Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-7 Reading Out the Diagnosis with STEP 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-8 Event Detection of the CPUs 41x as DP Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-9 Configuration Example for the Address Areas of
the Intermediate Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
4-10 Meaning of the BUSF LEDs of the CPU 41x as DP Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4-11 Reading Out the Diagnostic Data with STEP 5 and STEP 7
in the Master System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4-12 Event Detection of the CPUs 41x as DP Slave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-13 Evaluation of RUN-STOP Transitions in the DP Master/DP Slave . . . . . 4-48
4-14 Structure of Station Status 1 (Byte 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
4-15 Structure of Station Status 2 (Byte 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-16 Structure of Station Status 3 (Byte 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-17 Structure of the Master PROFIBUS Address (Byte 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-18 Structure of the Manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
4-19 Event Detection of the CPUs 41x as Recipient During
Direct Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4-20 Evaluation of the Station Failure in the Sender During
Direct Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
5-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-2 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-3 Relay Output Module: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5-4 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module 5-5
5-5 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5-6 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5-7 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-8 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules, Causes of
Errors and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-9 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5-10 How the Input Values Depend on the Operating Mode of the
CPU and on the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . 5-29
5-11 How the Input Values Are Affected by Faults and by

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


xxiv A5E00069467-04
Contents

the Parameter Assignment of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . 5-30


5-12 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16 x 24/60 VUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
5-13 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 x 20-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
5-14 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A
(6ES7 422-7BL00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5-15 Dependence of the Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU
and on the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . 5-67
5-16 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 20-120 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
6-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-2 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
6-3 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module 6-7
6-4 Example: Bit Pattern of a 16-Bit and a 13-Bit Analog Value . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-5 Possible Resolutions of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-6 Bipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6-7 Unipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-8 Life-Zero Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-9 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges
+ 10 V to + 1 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-10 Analog Value Representation in the Voltage Measuring Ranges
+ 500 mV to + 25 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-11 Analog Value Representation in the Voltage Measuring Ranges
1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-12 Analog Value Representation in the Current Measuring Ranges
+ 20 mA to + 3.2 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-13 Analog Value Representation in the Current Measuring Ranges
0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-14 Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Sensors from
48 W to 6 kW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-15 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers
Pt 100, 200, 500,1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6-16 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers
Pt 100, 200, 500,1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-17 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers
Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-18 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers
Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-19 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 . . . . . 6-17
6-20 Analog Value Representation for Resistance Thermometers Cu 10 . . . . . 6-18
6-21 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-22 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-23 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-24 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6-25 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6-26 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-27 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Types R, S . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-28 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6-29 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Type U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6-30 Bipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6-31 Unipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6-32 Life-Zero Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6-33 Analog Value Representation in Output Range + 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V . 6-26

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 xxv
Contents

6-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Range + 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27


6-36 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges
0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-37 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the
Operating Mode of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6-38 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position
of the Analog Value Within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6-39 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position
of the Analog Value Within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6-40 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
6-41 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
6-42 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature . . . . . 6-56
6-43 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
6-44 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
6-45 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of
Errors and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
6-46 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
6-47 Channels for Resistance Measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit . . . . 6-79
6-48 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
6-49 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
6-50 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n+1 of
the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
6-51 Channels for Resistance and Temperature Measurement with
the SM 431; AI 8 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
6-52 Thermocouple with Reference Junction Compensation via
RTD on Channel 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
6-53 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
6-54 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . . 6-97
6-55 Interference Frequency Suppression and Filter Settling Time
with Smoothing of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0) . . 6-98
6-56 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel n+1
of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit (6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
6-57 Channels for Resistance Measurement of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit
(6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
6-58 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 14 Bit
(6ES7 431-1KF20-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
6-59 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
6-60 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel
n+1 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
6-61 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 13 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
6-62 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
6-63 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
6-64 Selection of the Measuring Method for Channel n and Channel
n+1 of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
6-65 Channels for Resistance and Temperature Measurement of
the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
6-66 Reference Junction Compensation via RTD on Channel 0
of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
6-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 16 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123
6-68 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-130
6-69 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . 6-133
6-70 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x RTD x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-134

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


xxvi A5E00069467-04
Contents

6-71 Parameters of the SM 431; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-140


6-72 How Response Times Depend on the Parameterized
Interference Frequency Suppression and Smoothing of
the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-141
6-73 Diagnostic Information of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-144
6-74 Measuring Ranges of the SM 431; AI 8 x 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-145
6-75 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 432; AO8 13 Bit . . . . . 6-150
7-1 Interface Modules of the S7-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2 Terminators for the Receive IMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-3 Connecting Cable for Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
8-1 S5 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2 LEDs of the IM 4632 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-3 LEDs of the IM 463-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-4 Switch Position: Interface Selector of the IM 463-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-5 Settings Address Areas on the IM 314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8-6 Assignment of the Connecting Cable 721 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8-7 Assignment of the Terminator 760-1AA11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
9-1 Operating Modes of the IM 467/467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9-2 CPU and IM 467/467 FO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
10-1 Types of Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
11-1 Function of Fan Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
12-1 Maximum Cable Length of a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12-2 Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12-3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
13-1 Performance Features of the CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13-2 Technical Specifications of the CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13-3 Elements of the CPU 486-3 and CPU 488-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13-4 Meaning of the Status and Fault LEDs on the CPU 486-3 and CPU 488-3 13-7
13-5 Positions of the Mode Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13-6 Main Memory Expansion Possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13-7 BIOS Hot Keys with German and English Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
13-8 Main Memory Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
13-9 Interrupt Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
14-1 Expansion Possibilities of the CPU 486-3, CPU 488-3, or FM 456 . . . . . . 14-5
14-2 Division of Addresses Within an Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
14-3 Base Addresses of the Interface Submodules with FM 456-4 . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14-4 Base Addresses of the Expansion Modules with CPU 486-3,
CPU 488-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-12
14-5 Pin Assignments of the 98-Pin Standard Direct Connector
(ATConnector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
14-6 Calculation Example for Total Power Losses of an ATM 478 with
AT Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
14-7 MSM 478 Parallel Port, Socket X1 (25-Pin Sub D Socket) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
15-1 Format of the Interrupt Entry in the BIOS Setup of the
Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15-2 Overview of the Submodule IDs for the Interface Submodules . . . . . . . . 15-4
15-3 Insertion Rules for Interface Submodules that Cannot be Used in All
Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
15-4 Socket X1, VGA Screen Connection IF 962-VGA
(15-Pin High-Density Sub D Socket Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
15-5 X2 Socket, Keyboard Plug Connection IF 961-VGA
(6-Pin Mini DIN Socket Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 xxvii
Contents

15-6 Interrupt Assignments of the IF 962-VGA Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . 15-7


15-7 Video Modes of the IF 962-VGA Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
15-8 Socket X1, X2 IF 962-COM (9-Pin Sub D Plug Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
15-9 Addressing the COM Ports in the AT-Compatible Address Area . . . . . . . . 15-12
15-10 Offset Address Assignments for the IF 962-COM Interface Submodule . 15-13
15-11 Offset Address for the Configuration Register (IF 962-COM) . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15-12 Meaning of the Data Bits in the Configuration Register (IF 962-COM) . . . 15-13
15-13 Meaning of the Addressing Type Bits in the Configuration Register
(IF 962-COM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14
15-14 Interrupt Assignments of the IF 962-COM Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . 15-15
15-15 Socket X1, IF 962-LPT (25-Pin Sub D Socket Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
15-16 Addressing the LPT Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
15-17 Offset Address Assignments for the IF 962-LPT Interface Submodule . . 15-20
15-18 Offset Address for the Configuration Register (IF 962-LPT) . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
15-19 Meaning of the Data Bits in the Configuration Register (IF 962-LPT) . . . . 15-21
15-20 Meaning of the Addressing Type Bits in the Configuration Register
(IF 962-LPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-21
15-21 Offset Address Assignments for the IF 961-DIO Interface Submodule . . 15-26
15-22 Offset Address for the Digital Input Function (IF 961-DIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
15-23 Assignment of the Digital Input (DI) Channels to the Bits (IF 961-DIO) . . 15-26
15-24 Offset Address for the Digital Output Function (IF 961-DIO) . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
15-25 Assignment of the Digital Output (DO) Channels to the Bits (IF 961-DIO) 15-27
15-26 Offset Address for the Acknowledgment Register (IF 961-DIO) . . . . . . . . 15-27
15-27 Meaning of the Bits in the Acknowledgment Register (IF 961-DIO) . . . . . 15-27
15-28 Offset Address for the Interrupt Register (IF 961-DIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27
15-29 Meaning of the Bits in the Interrupt Register (IF 961-DIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-28
15-30 Offset Address for the Interrupt Enable Register (IF 961-DIO) . . . . . . . . . 15-28
15-31 Meaning of the Bits in the Interrupt Enable Register (IF 961-DIO) . . . . . . 15-28
15-32 Offset Address for the Selection Register Rising Edge (IF 961-DIO) . . . . 15-28
15-33 Meaning of the Bits in the Selection Register Rising Edge (IF 961-DIO) . 15-28
15-34 Offset Address for the Selection Register Falling Edge (IF 961-DIO) . . . 15-29
15-35 Meaning of the Bits in the Selection Register Falling Edge (IF 961-DIO) 15-29
15-36 Offset Address for the Mode Register (IF 961-DIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29
15-37 Meaning of the Bits in the Mode Register (IF 961-DIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-29
15-38 Meaning of the Signals of the X1 Socket of the IF 961-AIO
Interface Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-34
15-39 Offset Address Assignments for the IF 961-AIO Interface Submodule . . 15-45
15-40 Meaning of the Data Bits in the Analog Output Function (IF 961-AIO) . . . 15-46
15-41 Meaning of the Input Bits in the Analog Input Function (IF 961-AIO) . . . . 15-47
15-42 Meaning of the Control Bits in the Analog Input Function (IF 961-AIO) . . 15-48
15-43 Representation of the Digitized Measured Value for the Analog
Input Function (Voltage and Current Measuring Range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-49
15-44 Representation of the Analog Output Ranges
(Voltage and Current Output Ranges) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-50
15-45 X1 Socket, IF 964-DP (9-Pin Sub D Connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-61
16-1 Cyclic Program Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16-2 Factors that Influence the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
16-3 Data for Calculation of the Transfer Time for the Process Image . . . . . . . 16-5
16-4 User program processing time for the CPU 417-4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16-5 Operating system scan time at scan cycle checkpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16-6 Increase in Cycle Time by Nesting Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
16-7 Reducing the Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-18

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


xxviii A5E00069467-04
Contents

16-8 Example of Calculating the Reaction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19


16-9 Hardware Interrupt and Diagnostic Interrupt Reaction Times;
Maximum Interrupt Reaction Time Without Communication . . . . . . . . . . . 16-23
16-10 Reproducibility of Time-Delay and Watchdog Interrupts of the CPUs. . . 16-26
A-1 SFCs for assigning Parameters to Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
B-1 Codes of the Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 xxix
Contents

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


xxx A5E00069467-04
General Technical Specifications 1
What are General Technical Specifications?
General technical specifications include the following:
The standards and test specifications complied with and met by the modules of
the S7-400/M7-400 programmable controllers
The test criteria against which the S7-400/M7-400 modules were tested

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


1.1 Standards and Approvals 1-2
1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility 1-5
1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries 1-8
1.4 Mechanical and Ambient Climatic Conditions for Operating the 1-9
S7-400/M7-400
1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of 1-13
Protection

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 1-1
General Technical Specifications

1.1 Standards and Approvals

IEC 61131-2
The S7-400/M7-400 programmable controller satisfies the requirements and
criteria of the IEC 61131-2 standard.

CE Mark
Our products satisfy the requirements and protection objectives of the EC
Directives listed below and comply with the harmonized European
standards (EN) promulgated in the Official Journals of the European Community
for programmable controllers:
89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC Directive)
73/23/EEC Electrical Equipment Designed for Use between Certain Voltage
Limits (Low-Voltage Directive)
The declarations of conformity are held at the disposal of the competent authorities
at the address below:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Bereich Automatisierungstechnik
A&D AS E 42
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg

EMC Directive
SIMATIC products have been designed for use in industrial environments.

Table 1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment

EMC Directive Requirements in respect of:


Emitted interference Immunity
Industry EN 50081-2 : 1993 EN 50082-2 : 1995

Low Voltage Directive


The products listed in the table below fulfill the requirements of EU low-voltage
directive (73/23/EEC). Adherence to this EU directive was tested in accordance
with IEC 61131-2.

Table 1-2 Products that Fulfill the Requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive

Name Order number


Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 x 120 VUC 6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0
Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC 6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


1-2 A5E00069467-04
General Technical Specifications

Table 1-2 Products that Fulfill the Requirements of the Low-Voltage Directive, Fortsetzung

Name Order number


Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/5 A 6ES7 422-1FF00-0AA0
Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 120/230 VAC/2 A 6ES7 422-1FH00-0AB0
Relay Output Module SM 422; DO 16 x 30/230 VUC/Rel5A 6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0
The 120/230 VAC Fan Subassembly 6ES7 408-1TB00-0XA0
PS 407 4A 6ES7 407-0DA00-0AA0
PS 407 4A 6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0
PS 407 10A 6ES7 407-0KA00-0AA0
PS 407 10A 6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0
PS 407 20A 6ES7 407-0RA00-0AA0
6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0
PS 407 10AR 6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0

Mark for Australia


Our products satisfy the requirements of Standard AS/NZS 2064 (Class A).

UL Approval
UL recognition mark
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to the UL 508 Standard:
Report E 85972
Report 143289 for the modules in Table 1-3

CSA Approval
CSA certification mark
Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to Standard C 22. No. 142:
Report LR 63533
Report 111 879 for the modules in Table 1-3

FM Approval
Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2, Group
A, B, C, D.
Temperature class: T4 at 60 C ambient temperature
Exception:

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 1-3
General Technical Specifications

The following applies to the power supply modules in Table 1-3:


Temperature class T3C at 60 C ambient temperature
Temperature class T4 at 40 C ambient temperature
In the case of the modules in Table 1-3 the T4 temperature class is achieved for
the whole system if the ambient temperature does not exceed 40 C during
operation. There are also certain additional requirements that you can comply
with by installing the system in cabinets.

Table 1-3 Power Supply Modules

Name Order number


PS 407 4 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 407-0DA00-0AA0
PS 407 10 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 407-0KA00-0AA0
PS 407 20 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 407-0RA00-0AA0
PS 405 4 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 405-0DA00-0AA0
PS 405 10 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 405-0KA00-0AA0
PS 405 20 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 405-0RA00-0AA0

Warning
! Personal injury or property damage can result.
In hazardous areas, personal injury or property damage can result if you create or
break an electrical circuit during operation of an S7-400/M7-400 (for example, by
means of plug-in connections, fuses, switches).
Do not create or break live electric circuits unless you are certain there is no
danger of explosion.

Safety Requirements for Installation


The S7-400/M7-400 programmable controllers are open type equipment to the
IEC 61131-2 standard and therefore adhere to the EU directive 73/23/EEC
Low-Voltage Directive and are UL/CSA certified as such.
To fulfill requirements for safe operation with regard to mechanical stability, flame
retardance, stability, and shock-hazard protection, the following alternative types of
installation are specified:
Installation in a suitable cabinet
Installation in a suitable housing
Installation in a suitably equipped, enclosed operating area.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


1-4 A5E00069467-04
General Technical Specifications

1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility

Introduction
In this section you will find information on the noise immunity of S7-400/M7-400
modules and on radio interference suppression.
All the components of S7-400/M7-400 systems meet the requirements of the
standards that apply in Europe provided they are installed in accordance with all
the appropriate regulations (see Installation Manual, Chapters 2 and 4).

Definition of EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to
function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with
that environment.

Warning
! Installation of expansions that have not been approved for the S7-400/M7-400 can
result in violations of the requirements and regulations for safety and
electromagnetic compatibility.
Use only expansions that have been approved for the system.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 1-5
General Technical Specifications

Pulse-Shaped Interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules when there
are pulse-shaped disturbance variables. A requirement for this is that the
S7-400/M7-400 system complies with the relevant requirements and guidelines on
electric design.

Table 1-4 Pulse-Shaped Interference


Pulse-Shaped Interference Test Voltage Degree of
Severity
Electrostatic discharge Discharge to air: 8 kV
3
To IEC 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: 6 kV
Bursts (fast transient interference in accordance 2 kV (power supply line)
with IEC 61000-4-4) 2 kV (signal line > 10 m) 3
1 kV (signal line > 10 m)
Energy-rich single impulse (surge) to IEC 61000-4-5 3
Asymmetrical coupling 2 kV (supply line) DC voltage with
protective elements
2 kV (signal line/data line) > 10 m only,
possibly with protective elements
Symmetrical coupling 1 kV (supply line) DC voltage with
protective elements
1 kV (signal line) > 10 m only, possibly
with protective elements

Sinusoidal Interference
The following table shows you the EMC behavior of the S7-400/M7-400 modules
when there is sinusoidal interference.

Table 1-5 Sinusoidal Interference

Sinusoidal Interference Test Values Degree of


Severity
RF irradiation (electromagnetic fields)
To IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz
over the range from 80 MHz to 1000 MHz 3

To IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz


RF conductance on cables and cable Test voltage 10 V with 80% amplitude
shields to IEC 61000-4-6 modulation of 1 kHz over the range from 9 MHz 3
to 80 MHz

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


1-6 A5E00069467-04
General Technical Specifications

Emission of Radio Tnterference


Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit
value class A, Group 1.

Frequency Range Limit Value


From 20 to 230 MHz 30 dB (V/m)Q
From 230 to 1000 MHz 37 dB (V/m)Q
Measured at a distance of 30 m (98.4 ft.)

Emitted interference via the mains AC power supply in accordance with EN 55011:
Limit value class A, group 1.

Frequency Range Limit Value


From 0.15 to 0.5 MHz 79 dB (V)Q
66 dB (V)M
From 0.5 to 5 MHz 73 dB (V)Q
60 dB (V)M
From 5 to 30 MHz 73 dB (V)Q
60 dB (V)M

System Perturbation
The products listed in the table below fulfill the requirements of the following
standards for system perturbation:
Harmonic currents: EN 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations and flickering EN 61000-3-3

Table 1-6 Power Supply Modules that Comply with System Perturbation
Standards

Name Order Number


PS 407 4 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0
PS 407 10 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0
PS 407R 10 A Redundant Power Supply Module 6ES7 422-0KR00-0AA0
PS 407 20 A Power Supply Module 6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0

Additional Measures
If you want to connect an S7-400 or M7-400 system to the public power system,
you must ensure compliance with limit value class B in accordance with
EN 55022.
Suitable additional measures must be taken, if you need to enhance the noise
immunity of the system as a result of high external noise levels.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 1-7
General Technical Specifications

1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup


Batteries

Shipping and Storage of Modules


S7-400/M7-400 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131 in respect of
shipping and storage requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped
and/or stored in their original packing.
The climatic conditions conform to IEC 60721, Part 3-3, Class 3K7 for storage and
IEC 60721, Part 3-2, Class 2K4 for transport.
The mechanical conditions conform to IEC 60721, Part 3-2, Class 2M2.

Table 1-7 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules

Permitted Range
Free fall 1 m (up to 10 kg)
Temperature 40 C to +70 C
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponds to a height of -1000 to
3500 m)
Relative humidity 5 to 95 %, without condensation
(at +25 C)
Sinusoidal oscillations 5 to 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
to IEC 60068-2-6 9 to 500 Hz: 9.8 m/s2
Shock to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks

Shipping of Backup Batteries


Wherever possible, transport backup batteries in their original packing. No special
measures are required for the transport of the backup batteries used in the
S7-400/M7-400 systems. The lithium component of the backup battery is less than
0.5 g.

Storing Backup Batteries


Backup batteries must be stored in a cool, dry place. The maximum storage time is
10 years.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


1-8 A5E00069467-04
General Technical Specifications

Warning
! Improper handling of backup batteries can cause injury and material damage. If
backup batteries are not treated properly, they can explode and cause severe
burning.
Please observe the following rules when handling backup batteries used in the
S7-400/M7-400 programmable controllers:
never charge them
never heat them
never throw them in the fire
never damage them mechanically (drill, squeeze, etc.)

1.4 Mechanical and Ambient Climatic Conditions for Operating the


S7-400/M7-400

Operating Conditions
The S7-400/M7-400 is designed for weather-protected use as a permanent
installation. The S7-400/M7-400 fulfills the requirements for use in accordance with
IEC 60721-3-3:
Class 3M3 (mechanical requirements)
Class 3K3 (ambient climatic conditions)

Use with Additional Measures


The S7-400/M7-400, for example, must not be used without taking additional
measures:
In locations exposed to a high degree of ionizing radiation
In hostile environments caused, for instance, by
Dust accumulation
Corrosive vapors or gases
Strong electric or magnetic fields
In installations requiring special monitoring, for example
Elevators
Electrical installations in particularly hazardous areas
An additional measure might be, for instance, installation of the S7-400/M7-400 in
a cabinet or in a housing.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 1-9
General Technical Specifications

Ambient Mechanical Conditions


The ambient mechanical conditions for S7-400/M7-400 modules are listed in the
following table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations.

Table 1-8 Mechanical Conditions

Frequency Range in Hz Test Values


10 f < 58 0.075 mm amplitude
58 f < 500 1 g constant acceleration

Table 1-9 Ambient Mechanical Conditions for the MSM 478 Mass Storage Module in
Operation

Frequency Range in Hz Test Values


10 f < 58 0.035 mm amplitude
58 f < 500 0.5 g constant acceleration
Shock Semi-sinusoidal 5 g, 11 ms

Reducing Vibrations
If the S7-400/M7-400 is subject to high levels of shock or vibration, you must take
suitable measures to reduce the acceleration or amplitude.
We recommend that you install the S7-400/M7-400 on vibration-damping materials
(for example, rubber-metal antivibration mountings).

Tests for Ambient Mechanical Conditions


The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests
for ambient mechanical conditions.

Table 1-10 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test

Test ... Test Standard Remarks


Vibrations Vibration test in accor- Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a
dance with IEC 60068 rate of change of 1 octave/minute.
Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) 10 Hz f < 58 Hz, constant amplitude
0.075 mm
58 Hz f < 500 Hz, constant acceleration 1 g
Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps
per axis in each of three axes perpendicular
to each other
Shock Shock test in accor- Type of shock: half-sine
dance with IEC 60068 Severity of shock: 10 g peak value, 6 ms
Part 2-29 duration
Direction of shock: 100 shocks in each of the
3 axes arranged vertically to each other

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


1-10 A5E00069467-04
General Technical Specifications

Ambient Climatic Conditions for the S7-400


You can use the S7-400 under the following ambient climatic conditions:

Table 1-11 Ambient Climatic Conditions for the S7-400

Climatic Conditions Permitted Range Remark


Temperature 0 to +60 C
Temperature change Max. 10 C/h
Relative humidity Max. 95 % at +25 C No condensation,
corresponds to RH
stressing level 2 in
accordance with
IEC 61131-2
Atmospheric pressure 1080 to 860 kPa (corresponds to
a height of -1000 to 1500 m)
Concentration of SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Test: 10 ppm; 4 days
contaminants RH < 60 %, no condensation)

H2S: < 0.1 ppm; Test: 1 ppm; 4 days


RH < 60 %, no condensation)

Ambient Climatic Conditions for the M7-400


The M7-400 may be used under the following ambient climatic conditions:

Table 1-12 Ambient Climatic Conditions for the M7-400

Climatic Permitted Range Remark


Conditions
Temperature 0 to +60C When using a CPU 486-3 or 488-3

When using an MSM 478 without


5 to +55C diskette operation but with ventilation
When using an MSM 478 with
diskette operation or without
5 to +40C ventilation

(when using an ATM 478, the


permissible temperature range is
restricted by the AT module used)
Relative Max. 95 % No condensation, corresponds to RH
humidity stressing level 2 in accordance with
IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 1-11
General Technical Specifications

Table 1-12 Ambient Climatic Conditions for the M7-400

Climatic Permitted Range Remark


Conditions
Atmospheric 1080 to 869 kPa (corresponds to
pressure a height of -1000 to 1500 m)
Concentration Test:
of SO2: < 0.5 ppm; 10 ppm; 4 days
contaminants
RH < 60 %, no condensation)

H2S: < 0.1 ppm; 1 ppm; 4 days


RH < 60 %, no condensation)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


1-12 A5E00069467-04
General Technical Specifications

1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of


Protection

Test Voltages
Insulation resistance was demonstrated in routine testing with the following test
voltages in accordance with IEC 61131-2:

Table 1-13 Test Voltages

Circuits with Rated Voltage Ue to Other Circuits or


Test Voltage
Ground
0 V < Ue 50 V 350 V
50 V < Ue 100 V 700 V
100 V < Ue 150 V 1300 V
150 V < Ue 300 V 2200 V

Protection Class
Safety class I to IEC 60536 (VDE 0106, Part 1). In other words, a connection is
required from the protective conductor to the power supply module.

Protection Against Ingress of Foreign Bodies and Water


Degree of protection IP 20 to IEC 60529. In other words, there is protection against
contact with standard probes.
There is no special protection against the ingress of water.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 1-13
General Technical Specifications

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


1-14 A5E00069467-04
Racks

Racks 2
Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


2.1 Function and Structure of the Racks 2-2
2.2 The Racks UR1; 2-3
(6ES7 400-1TA01-0AA0) and UR2; (6ES7 400-1JA01-0AA0)
2.3 The Rack UR2-H; (6ES7 400-2JA00-0AA0) 2-5
2.4 The Rack CR2; (6ES7 401-2TA01-0AA0) 2-7
2.5 The Racks ER1; 2-8
(6ES7 403-1TA01-0AA0) and ER2; (6ES7 403-1JA01-0AA0)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 2-1
Racks

2.1 Function and Structure of the Racks

Introduction
The racks in the S7-400 have the following tasks:
They hold the modules
They supply the modules with operating voltage
They connect the individual modules to each other via the signal buses

Structure of the Racks


A rack consists of the following elements:
Aluminum mounting rail with threaded bolts for fixing the modules and lateral
cutouts for mounting the rack
Plastic parts that function, among other things, as guides when swinging the
modules into place.
A backplane bus, an I/O bus and, if necessary, a communication bus with bus
connector
Connection for local ground
Figure 2-1 shows the mechanical configuration of a rack (UR1).

Aluminum carrier Plastic parts

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Connection for local ground Bus connector (covered when shipped)

Figure 2-1 Structure of a Rack with 18 Slots

UL/CSA Note
Special requirements should be taken into consideration in the area of influence of
the UL/CSA; these may be fulfilled by installing the system in a cabinet.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


2-2 A5E00069467-04
Racks

2.2 The Racks UR1;


(6ES7 400-1TA01-0AA0) and UR2; (6ES7 400-1JA01-0AA0)

Introduction
The UR1 and UR2 racks are used for assembling central racks and expansion
racks.
The UR1 and UR2 racks have both an I/O bus and a communication bus.

Suitable Modules for UR1 and UR2


You can use the following modules in the UR1 and UR2 racks:
When the UR1 or UR2 is used as a central rack:
All S7-400 modules with the exception of receive IMs
When the UR1 or UR2 is used as an expansion rack:
All S7-400 modules with the exception of CPUs and send IMs
Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the
IM 461-1 receive IM.

Structure of the UR1 and UR2


Figure 2-2 shows the structure of the UR1 rack with 18 slots and the UR2 rack with
9 slots.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

I/O bus I/O bus


290 mm 190 mm

Communication bus Communication bus

40 mm

465 mm 240 mm

482.5 mm 257.5 mm

Figure 2-2 Dimensions of the 18-Slot or 9-Slot Rack

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 2-3
Racks

Technical Specifications of the UR1 and UR2 Racks

Rack UR1 UR2


Number of single-width slots 18 9
Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) 482.5 x 290 x 27.5 257.5 x 290 x 27.5
Weight (in kg) 3 1.5
Buses I/O bus and I/O bus and
communication communication
bus bus

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


2-4 A5E00069467-04
Racks

2.3 The Rack UR2-H; (6ES7 400-2JA00-0AA0)

Introduction
The UR2-H rack is used for assembling two central racks or expansion racks in
one rack. The UR2-H rack essentially represents two electrically isolated UR2
racks on the same rack profile. The main area of application of the UR2-H is in the
compact structure of redundant systems (two subracks or subsystems in one
rack).

Suitable Modules for the UR2-H


You can use the following modules in the UR2-H rack:
When the UR2-H is used as a central rack:
All S7-400 modules with the exception of receive IMs
When the UR2-H is used as an expansion rack:
All S7-400 modules apart from CPUs, send IMs, the IM 463-2, and the adapter
module
Special case: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the
IM 461-1 receive IM.

Structure of the UR2-H


Figure 2-3 shows the structure of the UR2-H rack with 2 x 9 slots.

Subrack I Subrack II

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

290 mm 190 mm

40 mm

465 mm

482.5 mm

Figure 2-3 Dimensions of the Rack

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 2-5
Racks

Caution
! Danger of damage to equipment.
If you insert a power supply module in a slot that is not permitted for power supply
modules, the module may be damaged. Slots 1 to 4 are permitted, whereby power
supply modules starting from slot 1 must be inserted without leaving gaps.
Make sure that power supply modules are only inserted in permitted slots. Take
particular notice of the option of swapping modules in slot 1 on subrack II and slot
9 on subrack I.

Technical Specifications of the UR2-H Rack

Rack UR2-H
Number of single-width slots 2x9
Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) 482.5 x 290 x 27.5
Weight (in kg) 3
Buses Segmented I/O bus,
segmented communication bus

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


2-6 A5E00069467-04
Racks

2.4 The Rack CR2; (6ES7 401-2TA01-0AA0)

Introduction
The CR2 rack is used for assembling segmented central racks. The CR2 has both
an I/O bus and a communication bus. The I/O bus is split into two local bus
segments with 10 or 8 slots.

Suitable Modules for the CR2


You can use the following modules in the CR2 rack:
All S7-400 modules with the exception of receive IMs

Structure of the CR2


Figure 2-4 shows the structure of the CR2 rack.

SEG1 SEG2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

I/O bus I/O bus


Segment 1 Segment 2

Communication bus

Figure 2-4 CR2 Rack

Technical Specifications of the CR2 Rack

Rack CR2
Number of single-width slots 18
Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) 482.5 x 290 x 27.5
Weight (in kg) 3
Busses Segmented I/O bus,
continuous communication bus
Only one power supply module required

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 2-7
Racks

2.5 The Racks ER1;


(6ES7 403-1TA01-0AA0) and ER2; (6ES7 403-1JA01-0AA0)

Introduction
The ER1 and ER2 racks are used for assembling expansion racks.
The ER1 and ER2 racks have only one I/O bus with the following restrictions:
Interrupts from modules in the ER1 or ER2 have no effect since there are no
interrupt lines provided.
Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not supplied with 24 V. Modules requiring a
24 V supply are not provided for use in the ER1 or ER2.
Modules in the ER1 or ER2 are not backed up either by the battery in the power
supply module or by the voltage supplied externally to the CPU or the receive
IM (EXT.-BATT. socket).
Battery faults and backup voltage faults are not reported to the CPU.
The battery monitoring function of a power supply module installed in the ER1
or ER2 should therefore always be switched off.

Suitable Modules for ER1 and ER2


You can use the following modules in the ER1 and ER2 racks:
All power supply modules
Receive IMs
All signal modules provided the above-mentioned restrictions are observed.
However: Power supply modules cannot be used in conjunction with the IM 461-1
receive IM.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


2-8 A5E00069467-04
Racks

Structure of ER1 and ER2


Figure 2-5 shows the structure of an ER1 rack with 18 slots.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

I/O bus

Figure 2-5 ER1 Rack

Figure 2-6 shows the structure of an ER2 rack with 9 slots.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

I/O bus

Figure 2-6 ER2 Rack

Technical Specifications of the ER1 and ER2 Racks

Rack ER1 ER2


Number of single-width slots 18 9
Dimensions W x H x D (in mm) 482.5 x 290 x 27.5 257.5 x 290 x 27.5
Weight (in kg) 2.5 1.25
Busses Restricted Restricted
I/O bus I/O bus

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 2-9
Racks

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


2-10 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules 3
Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


3.1 Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Modules 3-2
3.2 Redundant Power Supply Modules 3-4
3.3 Backup Battery (Option) 3-6
3.4 Controls and Indicators 3-7
3.5 Fault/Error Messages via LEDs 3-11
3.6 Power Supply Module 3-16
PS 407 4A; (6ES7 407-0DA00-0AA0)
3.7 Power Supply Module 3-18
PS 407 4A; (6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0)
3.8 Power Supply Modules 3-20
PS 407 10A; (6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0) and
PS 407 10A R; (6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0)
3.9 Power Supply Module 3-22
PS 407 20A; (6ES7 407-0RA00-0AA0)
3.10 Power Supply Module 3-24
PS 407 20A; (6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0)
3.11 Power Supply Module 3-26
PS 405 4A; (6ES7 405-0DA00-0AA0)
3.12 Power Supply Module 3-28
PS 405 4A; (6ES7 405-0DA01-0AA0)
3.13 Power Supply Module 3-30
PS 405 10A; (6ES7 405-0KA00-0AA0)
3.14 Power Supply Modules 3-32
PS 405 10A; (6ES7 405-0KA01-0AA0) and
PS 405 10A R; (6ES7 405-0KR00-0AA0)
3.15 Power Supply Module 3-34
PS 405 20A; (6ES7 405-0RA00-0AA0)
3.16 Power Supply Module 3-36
PS 405 20A; (6ES7 405-0RA01-0AA0)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-1
Power Supply Modules

3.1 Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Modules

Tasks of the Power Supply Modules


The power supply modules of the S7-400 supply the other modules in the rack with
their operating voltages via the backplane bus. They do not provide load voltages
for the signal modules.

Common Characteristics of the Power Supply Modules


The power supply modules share certain common characteristics in addition to
their special technical specifications. The most important common characteristics
are:
Encapsulated design for use in mounting racks of the S7-400 system
Cooling via natural convection
Plug-in connection of the supply voltage with AC - DC coding
Protection class I (with protective conductor) in accordance with IEC 60536;
VDE 0106, Part 1
Limitation of making current in accordance with NAMUR recommendation part 1
of August 1998
Short circuit-proof outputs
Monitoring of both output voltages. If one of these voltages fails, the power
supply module signals a fault to the CPU.
Both output voltages (5 VDC and 24 VDC) share a common ground.
Primary clocked
Battery backup as option. The parameters set and the memory contents (RAM)
are backed up via the backplane bus in the CPUs and programmable modules.
In addition, the backup battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU.
Both the power supply module and the backed up modules monitor the battery
voltage.
Operating and fault/error LEDs on the front plate.

Warning
A mains disconnecting device must be provided when installing AC power supply
modules.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-2 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Switching the Line Voltage Off/On


The power supply modules have a making-current limiter in accordance with
NAMUR. If you switch off the line voltage or disconnect the power supply module
from the mains, you must wait approximately 20 seconds before switching the
mains back on. Only this ensures that the making-current limiter of the power
supply module is fully effective.

Power Supply Module in Invalid Slot


If you insert the power supply module in an invalid slot of a rack, it will not power
up. In this case, proceed as follows to start up the power supply module correctly:
1. Disconnect the power supply module from the mains (not just the standby
switch).
2. Remove the power supply module.
3. Install the power supply module in slot 1.
4. Wait at least 1 minute and then switch the line voltage on again.

Compliance with the NAMUR Recommendation


If you use one of the modules listed below, you can achieve mains buffering in
accordance with the NAMUR recommendation with a central power supply in
accordance with NAMUR or an uninterrupted power supply.

Name Order number


Power Supply Module PS 407 4 A 6ES7 407-0DA00-0AA0
Power Supply Module PS 407 20 A 6ES7 407-0RA00-0AA0
Power Supply Module PS 405 4 A 6ES7 405-0DA00-0AA0
Power Supply Module PS 405 10 A 6ES7 405-0KA00-0AA0
Power Supply Module PS 405 20 A 6ES7 405-0RA00-0AA0

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-3
Power Supply Modules

3.2 Redundant Power Supply Modules

Order Numbers and Function

Type Order Number Input Voltage Output Voltage See


Section
PS 407 10A R 6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0 85 VAC to 264 VAC or 5 VDC/10 A and 3.8
88 VDC to 300 VDC 24 VDC/1 A
PS 405 10A R 6ES7 405-0KR00-0AA0 19.2 VDC to 72 VDC 5 VDC/10 A and 3.14
24 VDC/1 A

Redundant Operation
If you use two power supply modules of type PS 407 10A R or PS 405 10A R, you
can install a redundant power supply on a mounting rack. We recommend this if
you want to increase the availability of your programmable controller, particularly if
you are operating it on an unreliable power system.

Configuring a Redundant Power Supply


Redundant operation is possible with any of the S7 CPUs and racks described in
this manual. You must also have STEP 7, version 4.02.
To install a redundant power supply, insert two power supply modules in adjacent
slots of a rack (UR, CR or ER) beginning from the left (i.e. without a gap on slots 1
to 4). You can then insert as many modules as can be supplied by a single power
supply module. In other words, in redundant operation all the modules can only
draw a total of 10 A.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-4 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Characteristics
The redundant power supply of an S7-400 has the following characteristics:
The power supply module delivers a making current in accordance with
NAMUR.
Each of the power supply modules can take over the supply of power to the
whole rack if the other one fails. There is no loss of operation.
Each of the power supply modules can be exchanged while the system is in
operation. No loss of power and no peak stress occurs with the effective
voltages when the modules are removed or inserted.
Each of the power supply modules monitors its function and sends a message if
it fails.
Neither of the power supply modules can generate an error which affects the
output voltage of the other power supply module.
A redundant battery concept (backup concept) is only provided when two
backup batteries are used in each of the power supply modules. If only one
battery is used in each module, only non-redundant backup is possible, since
both batteries are being used at the same time.
The failure of a power supply module is registered via a plug and remove
interrupt (default STOP). Only if used in the second segment of the CR 2 is no
message sent if the power supply module fails.
If two power supply modules have been inserted but only one is switched on, a
startup delay of up to a minute occurs on power on.

Note
The check box Startup if preset configuration not equal to actual configuration
should be activated in the Properties dialog box of the CPU.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-5
Power Supply Modules

3.3 Backup Battery (Option)

Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 have a battery compartment for one or
two backup batteries. Use of these batteries is optional.

Function of the Backup Batteries


If backup batteries have been installed, the parameters set and the memory
contents (RAM) will be backed up via the backplane bus in CPUs and
programmable modules if the supply voltage fails. The battery voltage must be
within the tolerance range.
In addition, the backup battery enables you to carry out a restart of the CPU after
power-on.
Both the power supply module and the backed up modules monitor the battery
voltage.

Power Supply Modules With Two Backup Batteries:


Some power supply modules contain a battery compartment for two batteries. If
you use two batteries and set the switch to 2BATT, the power supply module
defines one of the two batteries as the backup battery. This assignment remains in
force until the battery is empty. When the backup battery is completely discharged,
the system switches to the reserve battery which is then in turn used as the
backup battery for the duration of its life. The status backup battery is also stored
in the event of a power failure.

Battery Type
Only batteries authorized by Siemens can be used (see Chapter 11: Replacement
Parts)
The batteries can form a passivation layer. Depassivation takes place when the
batteries are inserted in the power supply module.

Backup Times
The maximum backup time depends on the load on the backup battery. A battery
capacity of 63% of the rated capacity produces the following values:
Imax 200 A Backup time approximately 250 days
Imax 4 mA Backup time approximately 12.5 days
The maximum backup current is 4 mA.
You can find the backup currents of the modules in the technical specifications for
the relevant modules.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-6 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

3.4 Controls and Indicators

Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 have essentially the same controls and
indicators.
The main differences are:
Not all the power supply modules have a voltage selector.
Power supply modules with a backup battery have an LED (BATTF) that
indicates an empty, defective, or missing backup battery.
Power supply modules with two redundant backup batteries have two LEDs
(BATT1F and BATT2F) to indicate empty, defective or missing backup
batteries.

Operator Controls and Indicators


Figure 3-1 shows you an example of a power supply module (PS 407 20A) with
two (redundant) backup batteries. The LEDs are at the top left of the module front
plate.

Fixing screws
PS 407 20A

1 X 2 2 3
3 4
407-0RA00-0AA0

INTF

LEDs INTF,
BAF
BATTF
BATTF

5 VDC
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, 5 VDC, 24 VDC
24 VDC
5 VDC, 24 VDC

FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch (does not cut off mains)


BATT.1 BATT.2
Under cover
+ +

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.
2 BATT
OFF
Switches BATT. INDIC.
1 BATT
2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT
Voltage selector (if present)
230

VOLTAGE

3-pin plug-in power connector

Fixing screw

Figure 3-1 Controls and Indicators on the PS 407 20A Power Supply Module

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-7
Power Supply Modules

Meaning of the LEDs


The meaning of the LEDs on the power supply modules is described in the tables
below. Section 3.5 contains a list of the faults indicated by these LEDs and notes
on how to acknowledge the faults.

INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC

LED Color Meaning


INTF red Lights up in the event of an internal fault
5 VDC green Lights up as long as the 5 V voltage is within the tolerance limits
24 VDC green Lights up as long as the 24 V voltage is within the tolerance limits

BAF, BATTF
Power supply modules with a backup battery have the following indicators:

LED Color Meaning


BAF Red Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low
and the BATT INDIC switch is at the BATT position
BATTF Yellow Lights up if the battery is empty, if the polarity is reversed, or if
the battery is missing, and the BATT INDIC switch is at the BATT
position

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F


Power supply modules with two backup batteries have the following indicators:

LED Color Meaning


BAF Red Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low
and the BATT INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT or 2 BATT position
BATTF Yellow Lights up if battery 1 is empty or if the polarity is reversed or if the
battery is missing, and the BATT INDIC switch is at the 1 BATT
or 2 BATT position
BATTF Yellow Lights up if battery 2 is empty or if the polarity is reversed, or if
the battery is missing, and the BATT INDIC switch is at the
2 BATT position

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-8 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Battery Voltage on the Backplane Bus


The battery voltage is either supplied by the backup battery or externally into the
CPU or receive IM. In its normal state, the level of the battery voltage is between
2.7 V and 3.6 V.
The battery voltage is monitored for the lower limit. Violation of the lower limit is
indicated by the BAF LED and reported to the CPU.
BAF lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low. Possible
causes of this include:
Battery (batteries) empty or battery polarity has been reversed.
External supply via CPU or receive IM is defective or supply from secondary
power supply module is defective or missing.
Short circuit or overload on the battery voltage.

Note
Due to internal capacities, if you remove the battery or switch off the external
supply, some time may elapse before BAF, BATT1F, or BATT2F lights up.

Function of the Operator Controls

FMR momentary- For acknowledging and resetting a fault indicator after correcting the
contact pushbut- fault
ton
Standby switch Switches the output voltages (5 VDC/24 VDC) to 0 V by intervening in
the control loop (no mains disconnection).
I : Output voltages at rated value
: Output voltages 0 V
BATT INDIC Used for setting LEDs and battery monitoring
switch
Where one battery can be used (PS 407 4A, PS 405 4A):
OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive
BATT: BAF/BATTF LEDs and monitor signals active
Where two batteries can be used (PS 407 10A, PS 407 20A, PS
405 10A, PS 405 20A):
OFF: LEDs and monitor signals inactive
1 BATT: Only BAF/BATT1F LEDs (for battery 1) active.
2 BATT: BAF/BATT1F/BATT2F LEDs (for batteries 1 and 2) active.
Voltage selector For setting the primary voltage (120 VAC or 230 VAC), protected by its
(if present) own cover.
(Please note the following information)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-9
Power Supply Modules

Battery compart- For backup battery (batteries)


ment
Power connec- 3-pin connector for line voltage connection (do not plug in or remove
tion when power is on).

Caution
! One of the following power supply modules could be damaged:
Power supply module PS 407 4A (6ES7 407-0DA00-0AA0)
Power supply module PS 407 20A (6ES7 407-0RA00-0AA0)
If you set the voltage selector to 120 V on these AC power supply modules and
connect the power supply modules to a 230 V power system, it might damage the
power supply modules. Warranty is excluded in such a case.
Set the voltage selector on these AC power supply modules to the line voltage.

Cover
The battery compartment, battery selector switch, voltage selector switch and
power connection are housed under one cover. The cover must remain closed
during operation in order to protect these operator controls and to prevent static
electricity from affecting the battery connections.
If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your
body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. Use
grounded measuring devices only.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-10 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

3.5 Fault/Error Messages via LEDs

Introduction
The power supply modules of the S7-400 indicate module faults and backup
battery faults via LEDs on the front plate.

Overview of the Fault/Error Messages

Type of Fault/Error LEDs


Module fault INTF
5 VDC
24 VDC
Backup battery fault Power supplies with 1 backup battery:
BAF
BATTF
Power supplies with 2 backup batteries:
BAF
BATT1F
BATT2F

INTF, 5 VDC, 24 VDC


The following table shows the faults indicated by the INTF, 5 VDC, and 24 VDC
LEDs and lists how to remedy the faults.
The status of the BAF, BATTF, BATT1F, and BATT2F LEDs is not relevant here.

LED Cause of Fault Remedy


INTF 5 VDC 24 VDC
D D D Standby switch in position Set standby switch to the I position
Line voltage missing Check line voltage
Serious internal fault, power supply Replace power supply module
module defective
Cutoff after overvoltage on 5 V or illegal Disconnect from mains and reconnect
external supply after approximately 1 minute; if
necessary, remove external supply
Power supply module operated in Install the power supply module in the
wrong slot correct slot (slot 1)
Short circuit or overload on 5 V Switch off the power supply module,
remove the source of the short circuit;
after approximately 3 seconds, the
power supply module can be switched
on with the standby switch or via the
power system.*
D H D Overvoltage on 24 V Check if the supply is external; if not,
replace power supply module
H D* D Short circuit or overload on 5 V and Check load on the power supply
24 V module.
Possibly remove modules

D = LED is dark; L = LED lights up; F = LED flashing;

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-11
Power Supply Modules

LED Cause of Fault Remedy


INTF 5 VDC 24 VDC
H D* L/D ** Short circuit or overload on 5 V Check load on the power supply
module. Possibly remove modules
H H D If the standby switch is at the Remove all modules.
position, illegal external supply on 5 V Determine which module is faulty
If the standby switch is at the I Check load on the power supply
position, short-circuit or overload on module.
24 V Possibly remove modules
D B H Voltage restored after short circuit or Press FMR momentary-contact
overload on 5 V if faults occur in pushbutton:
operation Flashing light changes to constant light
Dynamic overload on 5 V Check load on the power supply
module.
Possibly remove modules
D H B Voltage restored after short-circuit or Press FMR momentary-contact
overload on 24 V if faults occur in pushbutton:
operation Flashing light changes to constant light
Dynamic overload on 24 V Check load on the power supply
module.
Possibly remove modules
D B B Voltage restored after short circuit or Press FMR momentary-contact
overload on 5 V and 24 V if faults occur pushbutton:
in operation Flashing light changes to constant light
D B B Dynamic overload on 5 V and 24 V Check load on the power supply
module.
Possibly remove modules
D = LED is dark; L = LED lights up; F = LED flashing;
* If the power supply module does not start up again after a few seconds once the
overload has been removed, remove power to the module for 5 minutes and then
switch it on again. If the module stills does not start up, you must replace it. This
applies to 6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0, release 3 and for 6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0,
release 5.
** Depending on the short-circuit resistance
If either the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs remains dark after switching on, the system
has not powered up.
If either of the 5 VDC or 24 VDC LEDs of the PS 407 10AR remains dark for
longer than 1 or 2 seconds after it is switched on, the power supply module will not
start up.
The following power supply modules will switch off in the event of a short circuit or
overload after 1 s to 3 s. The module will try to restart after no more than 3 s. If the
error has been eliminated by then, the module will start up. This applies to the
following modules:
PS 405 4A (6ES7 405-0DA01-0AA0) PS 407 4A (6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0)
PS 405 10A (6ES7 405-0KA01-0AA0) PS 407 10A (6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0),
release 5
PS 405 10A R (6ES7 405-0KR00-0AA0) PS 407 10A R (6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0),
release 7
PS 405 20A (6ES7 405-0RA01-0AA0) PS 407 20A (6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-12 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

BAF, BATTF
The following table applies to power supply modules with one battery if the BATT
INDIC switch is in the BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to
remedy the faults.

LED Cause of Fault Remedy


BAF BATTF
H H Battery empty or missing Insert new battery.
No backup voltage available Press FMR momentary-contact
pushbutton
D H Battery empty or missing Insert new battery.
Press FMR momentary-contact
pushbutton
Battery has been stored for Depassivate battery
too long (see Installation Manual, Chapter 7)

H D Battery in order Fault after plugging in a module:


No backup voltage available Plugged-in module defective
(short circuit) Fault after switching on: Remove all
modules and plug in individually
D D Battery in order

D = LED is dark; L = LED lights up;

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-13
Power Supply Modules

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F


The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT
INDIC switch is in the 1BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to
remedy the faults.
Nothing is indicated about the condition of any second battery that may be in use.

LED Cause of Fault Remedy


BAF BATTF BATTF

H H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in


No backup voltage available compartment 1.
Press FMR
momentary-contact
pushbutton
D H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in
compartment 1.
Press FMR
momentary-contact
pushbutton
Battery has been stored for Depassivate battery
too long (see Installation Manual,
Chapter 7)
H D D Battery 1 in order Fault after plugging in a
No backup voltage available module: Plugged-in
(short circuit) module defective
Fault after switching on:
Remove all modules and
plug in individually
D D D Battery 1 in order

D = LED is dark; L = LED lights up;

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-14 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

The following table applies to power supply modules with two batteries if the BATT
INDIC switch is in the 2BATT position. It shows the faults indicated and lists how to
remedy the faults.

LED Cause of Fault Remedy


BAF BATTF BATTF

H H H Both batteries are empty or Insert new batteries in compartments 1


missing. and 2
No backup voltage available Press FMR momentary-contact
pushbutton
D H H Both batteries empty or missing Insert new batteries in compartments 1
and 2
Press FMR momentary-contact
pushbutton
H H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 1.
Press FMR momentary-contact
pushbutton
No backup voltage available Fault after plugging in a module:
(short circuit or overload) Plugged-in module defective
Fault after switching on: Remove all
modules and plug in individually
D H D Battery 1 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 1.
Press FMR momentary-contact
pushbutton
Battery has been stored for too Depassivate battery
long (see Installation Manual, Chapter 7)
H D H Battery 2 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 2.
Press FMR momentary-contact
pushbutton
No backup voltage available Fault after plugging in a module:
(short-circuit or overload) Plugged-in module defective
Fault after switching on: Remove all
modules and plug in individually
D D H Battery 2 empty or missing Insert new battery in compartment 2.
Press FMR momentary-contact
pushbutton
Battery has been stored for too Depassivate battery
long (see Installation Manual, Chapter 7)
H D D Both batteries in order. Fault after plugging in a module:
No backup voltage available Plugged-in module defective
(short circuit) Fault after switching on: Remove all
modules and plug in individually
D D D Both batteries in order.

D = LED is dark; L = LED lights up;

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-15
Power Supply Modules

3.6 Power Supply Module PS 407 4A; (6ES7 407-0DA00-0AA0)

Function
The PS 407 4 A power supply module is designed for connecting to an AC line
voltage of 120/230 VAC and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24 VDC/0.5 A on the
secondary side.

Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4A

Fixing screw
PS 407 4A
X 2
1
3 4
407-0DA00-0AA0

INTF

BAF
BATTF
LEDs INTF,
5 VDC
BAF, BATTF,
24 VDC
5 VDC, 24 VDC

FMR FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch (does not cut off mains)

Under cover

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.
BATT Switches BATT. INDIC.
OFF
BATT, OFF
Voltage selector switch
230

VOLTAGE

3-pin plug-in power connector


Fixing screw

Figure 3-2 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-16 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Technical Specifications of the PS 407 4A

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Variables


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 25x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 0.78 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC /24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm 2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule
with insulating collar;
Rated values 5 VDC: 4 A
use only flexible sheath 24 VDC: 0.5 A
cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 120/230 VAC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 100 mA Base
Permitted range 85 to 132 VAC / load required
170 to 264 VAC 24 VDC: Idling-proof
(no base load required)
System frequency
Other Parameters
Rated value 50 / 60 Hz
Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz
Protection class in accordance I, with protective
with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
Rated input current
Overvoltage category II
At 120 VAC 0.55 A
Pollution severity 2
At 230 VAC 0.31 A
Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
Inrush current
0 < Ue 50 V 700 VDC
With rated voltage of 264 V Peak value 15 A
(secondary <> PE)
Half-value width 2 ms
With rated voltage of 132 V Peak value 18 A 150 V < Ue 300 V 2200 VDC
Half-value width 2 ms (primary <> PE)

Leakage current < 3.5 mA Buffering of power failures:

Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN At 50 Hz 4.5 ms to 7.5 ms


VDE 0160, curve W2 At 60 Hz 6.5 ms to 8.5 ms
Power input 46.5 W
Power loss 13.9 W
Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
Backup battery (option) 1 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V /
1.9 Ah
Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-17
Power Supply Modules

3.7 Power Supply Module PS 407 4A;


(6ES7 407-0DA01-0AA0)

Function
The PS 407 4A power supply module is designed for connecting to either an AC
line voltage of 85 to 264 V or a DC line voltage of 88 to 300 V and
supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24 VDC/0.5 A on the secondary side.

Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4 A

Fixing screw
PS 407 4A
X 2
1
3 4
407-0DA01-0AA0

INTF

BAF
BATTF
LEDs INTF,
5 VDC
BAF, BATTF,
24 VDC
DC 5 V, DC 24 V

FMR FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch (does not cut off mains)

Under cover

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.
BATT Switches BATT. INDIC.
OFF
BATT, OFF

3-pin plug-in power connector


Fixing screw

Figure 3-3 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 4 A

Power connection
In contrast to the instructions on installing a power supply module in the S7-400,
M7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation manual, an AC
power connector is used for connecting the PS 407 4A to both an AC and DC
supply.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-18 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Polarity Reversal of L+ and L-


The polarity reversal of L+ and L- with supply voltages of between 88 VDC
and 300 VDC has no effect on the function of the power supply. The connection
should be made as described in the instructions in the Installation Manual,
Chapter 6.

Technical Specifications of the PS 407 4 A

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Rating


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 25x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 0.76 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC /24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm 2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule
with insulating collar;
Rated values 5 VDC: 4 A
use only flexible sheath 24 VDC: 0.5 A
cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 110/230 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 100 mA Base
120/230 VAC load required
Permitted range 88 to 300 VDC, 24 VDC: Idling-proof
85 to 264 VAC (no base load required)
(long-range input)
Other Parameters
System frequency
Protection class in accordance I, with protective
Rated value 50 / 60 Hz with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz
Overvoltage category II
Rated input current
Pollution severity 2
At 120 VAC 0.38 A
Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
At 120 VDC 0.37 A
0 < Ue 50 V 700 VDC
At 240 VAC 0.22 A (secondary <> PE)
At 240 VDC 0.19 A 150 V < Ue 300 V 2200 VDC
Leakage current < 3.5 mA (primary <> PE)

Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN Buffering of power failures: >20 ms


VDE 0160, curve W2
Power consumption 240 VDC 52 W
Power loss 20 W
Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
Backup battery (option) 1 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V /
1.9 Ah
Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-19
Power Supply Modules

3.8 Power Supply Modules


PS 407 10A; (6ES7 407-0KA01-0AA0) and
PS 407 10A R; (6ES7 407-0KR00-0AA0)

Function
The power supply modules PS 407 10A (standard) and PS 407 10A R
(redundancy-capable, see Section 3.2) are designed for connection to an AC line
voltage of 85 to 264 V or DC line voltage of 88 to 300 V and supply 5 VDC/10 A
and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.

Controls and Displays of the PS 407 10A and thge PS 407 10A R

Fixing screw
PS 407 10A
1 X 2
2
3 4
407-0KR00-0AA0

INTF

BAF
BATTF
BATTF LEDs INTF,
5 VDC BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F,
24 VDC
5 VDC, 24 VDC

FMR FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch (does not cut off mains)


BATT.1 BATT.2

+ + Under cover
Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.
2 BATT
OFF
Switches BATT. INDIC.
1 BATT
2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT

3-pin plug-in power connector

Fixing screw

Figure 3-4 Controls and Displays of the PS 407 10A and PS 407 10A R

Power Connection
In contrast to the instructions on installing a power supply module described in the
S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation manual,
an AC connector is used for connecting the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R to
both an AC and a DC supply.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-20 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Polarity Reversal of L+ and L-


The polarity reversal of L+ and L- with supply voltages of between 88 VDC
and 300 VDC has no effect on the function of the power supply. The connection
should be made as described in the instructions in the Installation Manual,
Chapter 6.

Technical Specifications of the PS 407 10A and the PS 407 10A R

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Variables


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 50x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 1.36 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC /24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule Rated values 5 VDC: 10 A
with insulating collar;
use only flexible sheath 24 VDC: 1.0 A
cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 110/230 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 200 mA base
Permitted range 120/230 VAC load required
88 to 300 VDC, 24 VDC: Idling-proof
85 to 264 VAC (no base load required)
(long-range input) Other Parameters
Protection class in accordance I, with protective
System frequency with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
Rated value 50 / 60 Hz Overvoltage category II
Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz
Pollution severity 2
Rated input current
Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
At 120 VAC 1.2 A (0.9 A*)
0 < Ue 50 V 700 VDC
At 110 VDC 1.2 A (1.0 A*) (secondary <> PE)
At 230 VAC 0.6 A (0.5 A*)
150 V < Ue 300 V 2300 VDC
At 230 VDC 0.6 A (0.5 A*) (primary <> PE)
Starting current inrush Buffering of power failures: > 20 ms
At 230 VAC Peak value 230 A, Power input 105 W*
half-value width 200 s
Power loss 29.7 W
Peak value 63 A*,
half-value width 1 ms* Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
At 300 VDC Peak value 230 A,
half-value width 200 s Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V /
1.9 Ah
Peak value 58 A*,
half-value width 1 ms Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2
Leakage current < 3.5 mA
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN
VDE 0160, curve W2

* PS 407 10A: As of version 5


* PS 407 10A R: As of version 7

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-21
Power Supply Modules

3.9 Power Supply Module PS 407 20A; (6ES7 407-0RA00-0AA0)

Function
The PS 407 20 A power supply module is designed for connecting to an AC line
voltage of 120/230 VAC and supplies 5 VDC/20 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the
secondary side.

Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 20 A

Fixing screws
PS 407 20A

1 X 2 2 3
3 4
407-0RA00-0AA0

INTF

LEDs INTF,
BAF
BATTF
BATTF

5 VDC
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, 5 VDC, 24 VDC
24 VDC

FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch (does not cut off mains)


BATT.1 BATT.2
Under cover
+ +

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.
2 BATT
OFF
Switches BATT. INDIC.
1 BATT
2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT
Voltage selector switch
230

VOLTAGE

3-pin plug-in power connector

Fixing screw

Figure 3-5 Controls and Displays of the PS 407 20A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-22 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Technical Specifications of the PS 407 20 A

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Rating


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 75x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 1.93 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC /24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm 2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule
with insulating collar;
Rated values 5 VDC: 20 A
use only flexible sheath 24 VDC: 1.0 A
cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 120/230 VAC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 200 mA base
Permitted range 85 to 132 VAC / load required
170 to 264 VAC 24 VDC: Idling-proof
(no base load required)
System frequency
Other Parameters
Rated value 50 / 60 Hz
Protection class in accordance I, with protective
Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz
with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
Rated input current
Overvoltage category II
At 120 VAC 1.87 A
Pollution severity 2
At 230 VAC 1A
Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
Starting current inrush
0 < Ue 50 V 700 VDC
Rated input current 264 V Peak value 70 A (secondary <> PE)
Rated input current 132 V Half-value width 2 ms
150 V < Ue 300 V 2200 VDC
Peak value + 110 A/ (primary <> PE)
65 A
Half-value width 1.5 ms Buffering of power failures:
At 50 Hz
Leakage current < 3.5 mA
At 60 Hz 4.5 ms to 7.5 ms
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN 6.5 ms to 8.5 ms
VDE 0160, curve W2
Power input 162 W
Power loss 35.6 W
Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V /
1.9 Ah
Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-23
Power Supply Modules

3.10 Power Supply Module PS 407 20A; (6ES7 407-0RA01-0AA0)

Function
The PS 407 20 A power supply module is designed for connecting to either an AC
line voltage of 85 to 264 VAC or a DC line voltage of 88 to 300 VDC and
supplies 5 VDC/20 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary side.

Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 20 A

Fixing screws
PS 407 20A

1 X 2 2 3
3 4
407-0RA01-0AA0

INTF

LEDs INTF,
BAF
BATTF
BATTF

5 VDC
BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F, 5 VDC, 24 VDC
24 VDC

FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch (does not cut off mains)


BATT.1 BATT.2
Under cover
+ +

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.
2 BATT
OFF
Switches BATT. INDIC.
1 BATT
2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT

3-pin plug-in power connector

Fixing screw

Figure 3-6 Controls and Indicators of the PS 407 20 A

Power Connection
In contrast to the instructions on installing a power supply module in the S7-400,
M7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation manual, an AC
power connector is used for connecting the PS 407 20A to both an AC and DC
supply.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-24 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Polarity Reversal of L+ and L-


The polarity reversal of L+ and L- with supply voltages of between 88 VDC
and 300 VDC has no effect on the function of the power supply. The connection
should be made as described in the instructions in the Installation Manual,
Chapter 6.

Technical Specifications of the PS 407 20 A

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Rating


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 75x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 2.2 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC /24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm 2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule
with insulating collar;
Rated values 5 VDC: 20 A
use only flexible sheath 24 VDC: 1.0 A
cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 110/230 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 200 mA base
Permitted range 120/230 VAC load required
88 to 300 VDC, 24 VDC: Idling-proof
85 to 264 VAC (no base load required)
(long-range input)
Other Parameters
Protection class in accordance I, with protective
System frequency
with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
Rated value 50 / 60 Hz
Overvoltage category II
Permitted range 47 to 63 Hz
Pollution severity 2
Rated input current
At 120 VAC / 110 VDC 1.5 A Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
0 < Ue 50 V
At 230 VAC / 230 VDC 0.8 A
700 VDC
(secondary <> PE)
Starting current inrush Peak value 88 A
150 V < Ue 300 V 2300 VDC
half-value width 1.1 ms (primary <> PE)
Leakage current < 3.5 mA Buffering of power failures: > 20 ms
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN Power input 168 W
VDE 0160, curve W2
Power loss 44 W
Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA,
3.6 V / 1.9 Ah
Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-25
Power Supply Modules

3.11 Power Supply Module PS 405 4A; (6ES7 405-0DA00-0AA0)

Function
The PS 405 4 A power supply module is designed for connecting to a DC line
voltage of 24 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24 VDC/0.5 A on the secondary
side.

Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 4 A

Fixing screw
PS 405 4A
X 2
1
3 4
405-0DA00-0AA0

INTF

LEDs INTF,
BAF
BATTF

5 VDC
BAF, BATTF,
24 VDC
5 VDC, 24 VDC

FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch

Under cover

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.
BATT
OFF Switches BATT. INDIC.
BATT, OFF

3-pin plug-in power connector

Fixing screw

Figure 3-7 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 4 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-26 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Technical Specifications of the PS 405 4 A

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Rating


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 25x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 0.8 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC /24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule,
use component
Rated values 5 VDC: 4 A
conductor or flexible 24 VDC: 0.5 A
sheath cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 24 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 100 mA Base
Permitted range Static: load required
19.2 VDC to 30 VDC 24 VDC: Idling-proof
Dynamic: (no base load required)
18.5 VDC to 30.2 VDC Other Parameters
Rated input current 2A Protection class in accordance I, with protective
Starting current inrush Peak value 27 A with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
Half-value width 10 ms Overvoltage category II
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN Pollution severity 2
VDE 0160, curve B2
Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
0 < Ue 50 V 700 VDC
(secondary <> PE)
150 V < Ue 300 V 2200 VDC
(primary <> PE)
Buffering of power failures: 4 ms to 5 ms
Power input 48 W
Power loss 16 W
Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
Backup battery (option) 1 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V /
1.9 Ah
Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-27
Power Supply Modules

3.12 Power Supply Module PS 405 4A; (6ES7 405-0DA01-0AA0)

Function
The PS 405 4A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line
voltage of 19.2 to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/4 A and 24 VDC/0.5 A on the
secondary side.

Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 4 A

Fixing screw
PS 405 4A
X 2
1
3 4
405-0DA01-0AA0

INTF

LEDs INTF,
BAF
BATTF

5 VDC
BAF, BATTF,
24 VDC
5 VDC, 24 VDC

FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch

Under cover

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.
BATT
OFF Switches BATT. INDIC.
BATT, OFF

3-pin plug-in power connector

Fixing screw

Figure 3-8 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 4 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-28 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Technical Specifications of the PS 405 4 A

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Rating


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 25x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 0.76 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC /24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule;
use component
Rated values 5 VDC: 4 A
conductor or flexible 24 VDC: 0.5 A
sheath cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 24/48/60 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 100 mA Base
Permitted range Static: load required
19.2 VDC to 72 VDC 24 VDC: Idling-proof
Dynamic: (no base load required)
18.5 VDC to 75.5 VDC Other Parameters
Rated input current 2 A/1 A/0.8 A Protection class in accordance I, with protective
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
VDE 0160, curve B2 Overvoltage category II
Pollution severity 2
Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
0 < Ue 50 V 700 VDC
(secondary <> PE)
150 V < Ue 300 V 2200 VDC
(primary <> PE)
Buffering of power failures: > 20 ms
Power consumption (24 VDC) 48 W
Power loss 16 W
Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
Backup battery (option) 1 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V /
1.9 Ah
Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-29
Power Supply Modules

3.13 Power Supply Module PS 405 10A; (6ES7 405-0KA00-0AA0)

Function
The PS 405 10A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line
voltage of 24 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/10 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary
side.

Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 10 A

PS 405 10 A

405-0KA00-0AA0
X
3
2
4
2
Fixing screw
INTF

BAF
BATTF
BATTF LEDs INTF,
5 VDC BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F,
24 VDC
5 VDC, 24 VDC

FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch

+
BATT.1 BATT.2
+
Under cover

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.

Switches BATT. INDIC.


2 BATT
OFF
1 BATT

2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT

3-pin plug-in power connector

Fixing screw

Figure 3-9 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 10 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-30 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Technical Specifications of the PS 405 10 A

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Rating


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 50x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 1.4 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC /24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule;
use component
Rated values 5 VDC: 10 A
conductor or flexible 24 VDC: 1.0 A
sheath cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 24 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 200 mA base
Permitted range Static: load required
19.2 VDC to 30 VDC 24 VDC: Idling-proof
Dynamic: (no base load required)
18.5 VDC to 30.2 VDC Other Parameters
Rated input current 4.5 A Protection class in accordance I, with protective
Starting current inrush Peak value 44 A with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
Half-value width 20 ms Overvoltage category II
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN Pollution severity 2
VDE 0160, curve B2
Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
0 < Ue 50 V 700 VDC
(secondary <> PE)
150 V < Ue 300 V 2200 VDC
(primary <> PE)
Buffering of power failures: 4 ms to 5 ms
Power input 108 W
Power loss 33 W
Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V /
1.9 Ah
Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-31
Power Supply Modules

3.14 Power Supply Modules


PS 405 10A; (6ES7 405-0KA01-0AA0) and
PS 405 10A R; (405-0KR00-0AA0)

Function
The power supply modules PS 405 10A (standard) and PS 405 10A R
(redundancy-capable, see Section 3.2) are designed for connection to a DC line
voltage of 19.2 VDC to 72 VDC and supply 5 VDC/10 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the
secondary side.

Controls and Displays of the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R

PS 405 10 A

405-0KA01-0AA0
X
3
2
4
2
Fixing screw
INTF

BAF
BATTF
BATTF LEDs INTF,
5 VDC BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F,
24 VDC
5 VDC, 24 VDC

FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch

+
BATT.1 BATT.2
+
Under cover

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.

Switches BATT. INDIC.


2 BATT
OFF
1 BATT

2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT

3-pin plug-in power connector

Fixing screw

Figure 3-10 Controls and Displays of the PS 405 10A and PS 405 10A R

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-32 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Technical Specifications of the PS 405 10A and the PS 405 10A R

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Rating


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 50x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 1.4 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC/24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3 x 1.5 mm2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule,
use component
Rated values 5 VDC: 10 A
conductor or flexible 24 VDC: 1.0 A
sheath cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 24/48/60 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 200 mA base
Permitted range Static: load required
19.2 VDC to 72 VDC 24 VDC: Idling-proof
Dynamic: (no base load required)
18.5 VDC to 75.5 VDC Other Parameters
Rated input current 4.3 A/2.1 A/1.7 A Protection class in accordance I, with protective
Starting current inrush Peak value 18 A with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
Half-value width 20 ms Overvoltage category II
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN Pollution severity 2
VDE 0160, curve B2
Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
0 < Ue 50 V 700 VDC
(secondary <> PE)
150 < Ue 300 V 2300 VDC
(primary <> PE)
Buffering of power failures: > 20 ms
Power input 104 W
Power loss 29 W
Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V /
1.9 Ah
Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-33
Power Supply Modules

3.15 Power Supply Module PS 405 20A; (6ES7 405-0RA00-0AA0)

Function
The PS 405 20 A power supply module is designed for connecting to a DC line
voltage of 24 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/20 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the secondary
side.

Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A

PS 405 20A

1 X
3 4
2 2 3
Fixing screws
405-0RA00-0AA0

INTF

LEDs INTF,
BAF
BATTF
BATTF

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F,


5 VDC
24 VDC 5 VDC, 24 VDC

FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch
BATT.1 BATT.2 Under cover
+ +

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.

Switches BATT. INDIC.


2 BATT
OFF
1 BATT

2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT

3-pin plug-in power connector

Fixing screws

Figure 3-11 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-34 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Technical Specifications of the PS 405 20 A

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Rating


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 75x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 2.2 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC/24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule;
use component
Rated values 5 VDC: 20 A
conductor or flexible 24 VDC: 1.0 A
sheath cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 24 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 200 mA base
Permitted range Static: load required
19.2 VDC to 30 VDC 24 VDC: Idling-proof
Dynamic: (no base load required)
18.5 VDC to 30.2 VDC Other Parameters
Rated input current 7.2 A Protection class in accordance I, with protective
Starting current inrush Peak value 48 A with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
Half-value width 25 ms Overvoltage category II
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN Pollution severity 2
VDE 0160, curve B2
Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
0 < Ue 50 V 700 VDC
(secondary <> PE)
150 V < Ue 300 V 2200 VDC
(primary <> PE)
Buffering of power failures: 4 ms to 5 ms
Power input 172.8 W
Power loss 46.8 W
Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V /
1.9 Ah
Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-35
Power Supply Modules

3.16 Power Supply Module PS 405 20A; (6ES7 405-0RA01-0AA0)

Function
The PS 405 20A power supply module is designed for connection to a DC line
voltage of 19.2 VDC to 72 VDC and supplies 5 VDC/20 A and 24 VDC/1 A on the
secondary side.

Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A

PS 405 20A

1 X
3 4
2 2 3
Fixing screws
405-0RA00-0AA0

INTF

LEDs INTF,
BAF
BATTF
BATTF

BAF, BATT1F, BATT2F,


5 VDC
24 VDC 5 VDC, 24 VDC

FMR
FMR pushbutton (Failure Message Reset)

Standby switch
BATT.1 BATT.2 Under cover
+ +

Battery compartment

BATT. INDIC.

Switches BATT. INDIC.


2 BATT
OFF
1 BATT

2 BATT, OFF, 1 BATT

3-pin plug-in power connector

Fixing screws

Figure 3-12 Controls and Indicators of the PS 405 20 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-36 A5E00069467-04
Power Supply Modules

Technical Specifications of the PS 405 20 A

Dimensions, Weight, and Cable Cross-Sections Output Rating


Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 75x290x217 Output voltages
Weight 2.2 kg Rated values 5.1 VDC/24 VDC
Cable cross-section 3x1.5 mm2 (litz wire Output currents
with wire end ferrule;
use component
Rated values 5 VDC: 20 A
conductor or flexible 24 VDC: 1.0 A
sheath cable) Max. residual ripple 5 VDC: 50 mVSS
Cable diameter 3 to 9 mm 24 VDC: 200 mVSS
Input Rating Max. switching peaks 5 VDC: 150 mVS
Input voltage 24 VDC: 500 mVS
Rated value 24/48/60 VDC Idle conditions 5 VDC: 200 mA base
Permitted range Static: load required
19.2 VDC to 72 VDC 24 VDC: Idling-proof
Dynamic: (no base load required)
18.5 VDC to 75.5 VDC Other Parameters
Rated input current 7.3 A/3.45 A/2.75 A Protection class in accordance I, with protective
Starting current inrush Peak value 56 A with IEC 60536 grounding conductor
half-value width 1.5 ms Overvoltage category II
Overvoltage resistance In accordance with DIN Pollution severity 2
VDE 0160, curve B2
Rated voltage Ue Test Voltage
0 < Ue 50 V 700 VDC
(secondary <> PE)
150 V < Ue 300 V 2300 VDC
(primary <> PE)
Buffering of power failures: > 20 ms
Power input 175 W
Power loss 51 W
Backup current Max. 100 A at power
off
Backup batteries (optional) 2 x Lithium AA, 3.6 V /
1.9 Ah
Protective separation Yes
to IEC 61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 3-37
Power Supply Modules

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


3-38 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400 4
Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


4.1 Controls and Indicators of the CPUs 4-2
4.2 Overview of the Memory Concept and Startup Options of the 4-10
S7-400 CPUs
4.3 Monitoring Functions of the CPU 4-13
4.4 Status and Error LEDs 4-15
4.5 Mode Selector 4-18
4.6 Multipoint Interface (MPI) 4-22
4.7 PROFIBUS DP Interface 4-23
4.8 Overview of the Parameters for the S7-400 CPUs 4-24
4.9 Evaluation of the Process Interrupts in the S7-400H System 4-25
4.10 Multicomputing 4-26
4.11 CPU 41x as DP Master/DP Slave 4-30
4.12 Direct Communication 4-57
4.13 Diagnostics in Direct Communication 4-58
4.14 Technical Specifications of the CPU 412-1; 4-60
(6ES7 412-1XF03-0AB0)
4.15 Technical Specifications of the CPU 412-2; 4-64
(6ES7 412-2XG00-0AB0)
4.16 Technical Specifications of the CPU 414-2; 4-68
(6ES7 414-2XG03-0AB0)
4.17 Technical Specifications of the CPU 414-3; 4-72
(6ES7 414-3XJ00-0AB0)
4.18 Technical Specifications of the CPU 414-4H; 4-76
(6ES7 414-4HJ00-0AB0)
4.19 Technical Specifications of the CPU 416-2; 4-80
(6ES7 416-2XK02-0AB0)
4.20 Technical Specifications of the CPU 416-3; 4-84
(6ES7 416-3XL00-0AB0)
4.21 Technical Specifications of the CPU 417-4; 4-88
(6ES7 417-4XL00-0AB0)
4.22 Technical Specifications of the CPU 417-4H; 4-92
(6ES7 417-4HL01-0AB0)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-1
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.1 Controls and Indicators of the CPUs

Controls and Indicators of the CPU 412-1

CPU 412-1

6ES7412-1XF03-0AB0

INTF, EXTF, BUS1F, FRCE,


RUN, STOP LEDs
BUS1F

Slot for the memory card

Mode selector

Under cover

MPI/PROFIBUS DP interface

Incoming supply of external


backup voltage

Figure 4-1 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the CPU 412-1

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-2 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Controls and Indicators of the CPU 41x-2

CPU 414-2

6ES7414-2XG03-0AB0

INTF, EXTF, BUS1F,


BUS2F, FRCE, RUN, STOP
LEDs BUS1F
BUS2F

Slot for the memory card

Mode selector

Under cover

MPI/PROFIBUS DP interface

PROFIBUS DP interface

Incoming supply of external


backup voltage

Figure 4-2 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the CPU 41x-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-3
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Controls and Indicators of the CPU 41x-3

CPU 416-3

6ES7416-3XL00-0AB0

INTF, EXTF, BUS1F, IFM1F


BUS2F, FRCE, RUN, STOP LEDs
LEDs BUS1F
BUS2F

IFM1F

Slot for the memory card

Mode selector

Under cover Under cover

MPI/PROFIBUS DP interface
Memory card slot
for the interface
module

PROFIBUS DP interface

Incoming supply of external


backup voltage

Figure 4-3 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the CPU 41x-3

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-4 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Controls and Indicators of the CPU 417-4

INTF, EXTF, BUS1F, IFM1F, IFM2F


BUS2F, FRCE, RUN, STOP LEDs
LEDs BUS1F
BUS2F

IFM1F
IFM2F

Slot for the memory card

Mode selector

Under cover Under cover

MPI/PROFIBUS DP interface
Memory card slot
for the interface
module 1

Memory card slot


PROFIBUS DP interface for the interface
module 2

Incoming supply of external


backup voltage
Under the metal lid
on the left-hand side
Interface for
memory expansion

Figure 4-4 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the CPU 417-4

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-5
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Controls and Indicators of the CPU 414-4H/417-4H

INTF, EXTF, BUS1F, BUS1F REDF, IFM1F, IFM2F,


BUS2F, FRCE, RUN,
BUS2F
IFM1F
MSTR, RACK0, RACK1
STOP LEDs
IFM2F
LEDs
RACK0

Slot for the memory card RACK1

Mode selector

Under cover Under cover

Memory card slot for


MPI/PROFIBUS DP interface synchronization submodule 1

PROFIBUS DP interface Memory card slot for


synchronization submodule 2

Incoming supply of external


backup voltage
Under the metal lid
on the left-hand side
Interface for memory
expansion*
* Only in CPU 417-4H

Figure 4-5 Layout of the Controls and Indicators of the CPU 414-4H/417-4H

LEDs
Table 4-1 gives you an overview of the LEDs on the individual CPUs.
Section 4.3 describes the statuses and errors indicated by these LEDs.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-6 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Table 4-1 LEDs of the CPUs

LED Color Meaning In CPU


412-1 412-2 414-3 417-4 414-4H
414-2 416-3 417-4H
416-2
INTF red Internal fault x x x x x
EXTF red External fault x x x x x
FRCE yellow Active force request x x x x x
RUN green RUN mode x x x x x
STOP yellow STOP mode x x x x x
BUS1F red Bus fault at x x x x x
MPI/PROFIBUS DP
interface 1
BUS2F red Bus fault at x x x x
PROFIBUS DP interface
2
MSTR yellow CPU leads the process x
REDF red Loss of x
redundancy/redundancy
error
RACK0 yellow CPU in rack 0 x
RACK1 yellow CPU in rack 1 x
IFM1F red Error at interface x x x
submodule 1
IFM2F red Error at interface x x
submodule 2

Mode Selector
You can use the mode selector to select the current operating mode of the CPU.
The mode selector is a key switch with four switching positions. You can use
different protection levels and limit any program changes or startup options (STOP
to RUN transition) to a certain group of people.
Section 4.5 describes the functions of the mode selector and the protection levels
of the CPUs.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-7
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Slot for Memory Cards


You can insert a memory card in this slot.
There are two types of memory card:
RAM cards
You can expand the load memory of a CPU with the RAM card.
FLASH cards
You can use the FLASH card to store your user program and your data so that
they are failproof (even without a backup battery). You can either program the
FLASH card on the programming device or in the CPU. The FLASH card also
expands the load memory of the CPU.
You can find a detailed description of the memory cards in Chapter 10.

Slot for Interface Modules


In the slot you can insert an interface module (IF module) in each CPU 41x-3 and
CPU 41x-4 and the H-SYNC module in the CPU 414-4H and CPU 417-4H.

Interface for Memory Expansion


The CPU 417-4 and 417-4H also have interfaces for memory expansion. These
make it possible to expand the working memory. (See S7-400, M7-400
Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation )

MPI/DP Interface
You can connect the following devices to the MPI of the CPU, for example:
Programming devices
Operation and monitoring devices
Additional S7-400 or S7-300 controllers (see Section 4.6).
Use the bus connector with an angular outgoing cable (see the Installation manual,
Chapter 7)
You can also configure the MPI interface as a DP master and use it as a
PROFIBUS DP interface with up to 32 DP slaves.

PROFIBUS DP Interface
You can connect the distributed I/O, programming devices/OPs and additional
DP master stations to the PROFIBUS DP interface.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-8 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Incoming Supply of External Backup Voltage at the EXT.-BATT. Socket


You can use one or two backup batteries depending on the module type in the
power supply modules of the S7-400 to do the following:
Provide backup power for the user program you have stored in RAM
Ensure memory markers, timers, counters, system data and data in variable
data blocks remain retentive
Provide backup power for the internal clock
You can achieve the same backup if you apply DC voltage between 5 V and 15 V
at the EXT.-BATT. socket of the CPU.
The EXT.-BATT. input has the following features:
Reverse polarity protection
A short-circuit current limit of 20 mA
To provide an incoming supply at the EXT.-BATT socket, you need a connecting
cable with a 2.5 mm jack, as illustrated in the following figure. Note the polarity
of the jack.

Positive pole Negative pole

2.5 mm jack

Note
You will require the external incoming supply at the EXT.-BATT. socket if you
replace a power supply module and want to provide a backup supply for the user
program stored in RAM and the data mentioned above while the module is being
replaced.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-9
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.2 Overview of the Memory Concept and Startup Options of the


S7-400 CPUs

Subdivision of the Memory Areas


You can divide the memory of the S7 CPUs into the following areas:

External load memory


RAM with battery backup or
retentive flash memory
Load memory
For project data (blocks,
symbols, comments,
Integrated load memory configuration and parameter
assignment data)
RAM with battery backup

Code working memory


- For the program
- RAM with battery backup

Working memory
Working memory data
For runtime-relevant blocks
- For data
- RAM with battery backup

System memory
(RAM) contains:
Process image of the inputs/outputs,
memory markers, timers, counters
Local data stack
Block stack

Interrupt stack

Diagnostic buffer
Communication resources

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-10 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Memory Types in S7-400 CPUs


Load memory for project data, such as blocks, configuration and parameter
assignment data, including symbols and comments as of version 5.1.
Working memory for the runtime-relevant blocks (code blocks and data blocks).
System memory (RAM) contains the memory chips made available by each
CPU to the user program, such as the process image of the inputs and outputs,
memory markers, timers and counters. The system memory also contains the
block stack and the interrupt stack.
The system memory of the CPU also makes temporary memory available (local
data stack, diagnostic buffer and communication resources) that is assigned to
the program when a block is called for its temporary data. These data are only
valid as long as the block is active.
By changing the default values for the process image, local data, diagnostic
buffer and communication resources (see the object properties of the CPU in
HWCONFIG), you can control the working memory available to the
runtime-relevant blocks.

Subdivision of the Working Memory


It is possible to improve performance by 100% by subdividing memory into
program memory and data memory (not in the case of the CPU 412).
If a standard processor accesses its RAM at least twice, the S7-400 processor
accesses the code memory and data memory at the same time in a single
cycle. There is a separate code bus and data bus for this.

Flexible Memory Capacity


Working memory:
The capacity of the working memory is determined by selecting the appropriate
CPU from the finely graded range of CPUs.
In the case of the CPU 417, working memory can be expanded.
Load memory:
The integrated load memory is sufficient for small and medium-sized programs.
The load memory can be increased for larger programs by inserting the RAM
memory card.
Flash memory cards are also available to ensure that programs are retained in
the event of a power failure even if there isnt a backup battery. These flash
memory cards can also be used to send program updates.

Backup
The backup battery provides backup power for the integrated and external part
of the load memory, the data section of the working memory and the code
section.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-11
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Reboot, Restart
The reboot and restart are closely linked to the memory concept.
In the case of a reboot, you have to differentiate between a cold restart and a
warm restart.

Cold Restart
At a cold restart, all the data (process image, memory markers, timers,
counters and data blocks) are reset to the start values stored in the program
(load memory) - irrespective of whether they were parameterized as retentive or
non-retentive.
Program processing is started from the beginning again (startup OB or OB 1).

Warm Restart
At a warm restart, the process image and the non-retentive memory markers,
timers and counters are reset.
Retentive memory markers, timers and counters and all the data blocks retain
their last valid value.
Program processing is started from the beginning again (startup OB or OB 1).
When the power supply is interrupted, a warm restart is only possible in
backed-up mode.

Restart
At a restart, all the data, including the process image, retain their last valid
value.
Program processing is resumed at exactly the instruction at which the
interruption occurred.
The outputs are not changed until the end of the current cycle.
When the power supply is interrupted, a restart is only possible in backed-up
mode.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-12 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.3 Monitoring Functions of the CPU

Monitoring and Error Messages


The CPU hardware and the operating system have monitoring functions that
ensure that the system functions correctly and that there is a defined response in
the event of an error. A number of errors will also produce a response from the
user program.
The following table gives you an overview of possible errors, their causes and the
responses of the CPU.
There are also test and information functions available in each CPU that you can
call up with STEP 7.

Type of Cause of Fault Response of the Operating


Error LED
Fault/Error System
Clock pulse Monitoring of the failure of the Disabling of the digital outputs
failure processor clock pulse by issuing the OD (Output
System standstill Disable) signal
Access error Module failure (SM, FM, CP) EXTF LED lights up until the
fault is acknowledged.
In SMs:
OB 122 call
Entry in the diagnostic buffer
In the case of input EXTF
modules: Entry of null for the
date in the accumulator or
the
process image
In the case of other modules:
OB 122 call
Timing error The runtime of the user program INTF LED lights up until the
(OB1 and all the interrupts and fault is acknowledged.
error OBs) exceeds the specified
maximum cycle time. OB 80 call INTF
OB request error If the OB is not loaded: The CPU
Overrun of the start information goes into STOP mode.
buffer
Time error interrupt
Power supply In the central or distributed I/O rack: OB 81 call
module error At least one backup battery in the If the OB is not loaded: The CPU
(not power power supply module is empty. continues to run.
EXTF
failure) The backup voltage is missing.
The 24 V supply to the power
supply module has failed.
Diagnostic An I/O module with interrupt capability OB 82 call
Interrupt reports a diagnostic interrupt. If the OB is not loaded: The CPU EXTF
goes into STOP mode.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-13
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Type of Cause of Fault Response of the Operating


Error LED
Fault/Error System
Remove/insert Removal or insertion of an SM and OB 83 call
interrupt insertion of an incorrect module type. If the OB is not loaded: The CPU
If the only inserted SM is removed goes into STOP mode.
during STOP mode of the CPU with
EXTF
default parameter assignment, the
EXTF LED will not light up. If the SM
is inserted again, the LED lights up
briefly.
Priority class Priority class is called, but the OB 85 call
error corresponding OB is not If the OB is not loaded: The CPU
available. goes into STOP mode. INTF
In the case of an SFB call: The
instance DB is missing or
defective.
Error during the updating of the EXTF
process image
Failure of a Power failure in an expansion OB 86 call
rack/station rack If the OB is not loaded: The CPU
Failure of a DP line goes into STOP mode. EXTF
Failure of a coupling line: missing
or defective IM, interrupted line)
Communication Status information cannot be OB 87 call
error entered in DB If the OB is not loaded: The CPU
Incorrect frame identifier goes into STOP mode.
Frame length error
Impermissible global identifier INTF
number
DB access error
Configured S7 connections have
failed
Programming Error in the machine code or in the OB 121 call
error user program: If the OB is not loaded: The CPU
BCD conversion error goes into STOP mode.
Range length error
Range error
Alignment error INTF
Write error
Timer number error
Counter number error
Block number error
Block not loaded
MC7 code error Error in the compiled user program The CPU goes into STOP mode.
(e.g. impermissible OP code or jump Reboot or memory reset INTF
over the end of the block) required.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-14 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.4 Status and Error LEDs

Status LEDs
The two RUN and STOP LEDs on the front panel of a CPU tell you the currently
active CPU operating mode.

LED Meaning
RUN STOP
H D CPU is in RUN mode.
D H CPU is in STOP mode. The user program is not processed. Restart and
warm restart/reboot is possible. If the STOP status was triggered by an
error, the error indication (INTF or EXTF) is also set.
B B CPU has the status DEFECT. The INTF, EXTF and FRCE LEDs also
2 Hz 2 Hz flash.

B H HALT status has been triggered by a test function.


0.5 Hz
B H A warm restart/reboot/restart has been triggered. It can take a minute or
2 Hz longer to execute the warm restart/reboot/restart depending on the length
of the OB called. If the CPU still doesnt go into RUN, there might be an
error in the system configuration.
x B Memory reset is requested by the CPU.
0.5 Hz
x B Memory reset is running.
2 Hz

D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up; B = LED flashes with the specified frequency;
x = LED status is irrelevant

LEDs, CPU 414-4H/417-4H


The three LEDs MSTR, RACK0 and RACK1 on the front panel of the CPU 41x-4H
tell you about the rack number set on the synchronization submodule and about
which CPU has the process control for the switched I/O.

LED Meaning
MSTR RACK0 RACK1
H x x CPU has the process control for the switched I/O
x H D CPU on rack number 0
x D H CPU on rack number 1

D = LED is dark; H = LED lights up; x = LED status is irrelevant

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-15
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Error LEDs and Points to Note, All CPUs


The three LEDs INTF, EXTF and FRCE on the front panel of a CPU tell you about
the errors and points to note during the execution of the user program.

LED Meaning
INTF EXTF FRCE
H x x An internal error has been detected (programming or parameter
assignment error).
x H x An external error has been detected (in other words, the cause of
the error cannot be traced back to the CPU module).
x x H A force request is active.

H = LED lights up; x = LED status is irrelevant

The LEDs BUSF1 and BUSF2 indicate errors in connection with the MPI/DP
interface and the PROFIBUS DP interface.

LED Meaning
BUS1F BUS2F
H x An error has been detected at the MPI/DP interface.
x H An error has been detected at the PROFIBUS DP interface.
B x DP master: One or more slaves at PROFIBUS DP interface 1
are not replying.
DP slave: not addressed by the DP master
x B DP master: One or more slaves at PROFIBUS DP interface 2
are not replying.
DP slave: not addressed by the DP master

H = LED lights up; B = LED flashes; x = LED status is irrelevant

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-16 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Error LEDs and Points to Note, CPU 41x-3 and 41x-4


The CPUs 41x-3 and 41x-4 continue to have the LED IFM1F and LEDs IFM1F and
IFM2F. These indicate errors in connection with the first and second module
interfaces.

LED Meaning
IFM1F IFM2F
H x An error has been detected at module interface 1.
x H An error has been detected at module interface 2.
B x DP master: One or more slaves on the PROFIBUS DP interface
module inserted in module slot 1 are not responding
DP slave: not addressed by the DP master
x B DP master: One or more slaves on the PROFIBUS DP interface
module inserted in module slot 2 are not responding
DP slave: not addressed by the DP master

H = LED lights up; B = LED flashes; x = LED status is irrelevant

Error LEDs and Points to Note, CPU 414-4H/417-4H


The CPU 414-4H and CPU 417-4H also have the REDF LED. This indicates
certain system statuses and redundancy errors.

REDF LED System Status Limiting Conditions


Flashes at Linking
0.5 Hz
Flashes at 2 Hz Updating
Off Redundant (CPUs are No redundancy error
redundant)
Flashes Redundant (CPUs are There is an I/O redundancy error:
redundant) Failure of a DP master or partial or
complete failure of a DP master
system
Loss of redundancy on the
DP slave
All the system states apart
from redundant, linking,
updating

Diagnostic Buffer
You can read out the exact cause of an error in STEP 7 (PLC > Module
Information) from the diagnostic buffer.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-17
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.5 Mode Selector

Function of the Mode Selector


Using the mode selector, you can put the CPU in RUN/RUN-P or STOP mode or
reset the memory of the CPU. STEP 7 offers further options for changing the
mode.

Positions
The mode selector is a key switch. Figure 4-6 illustrates the possible positions of
the mode selector.

RUN-P

RUN

STOP

MRES

Figure 4-6 Positions of the Mode Selector

Table 4-2 explains the positions of the mode selector. In the event of a fault or if
there are startup problems, the CPU will go into or remain in STOP mode
irrespective of the position of the mode selector.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-18 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Table 4-2 Positions of the Mode Selector

Position Explanation
RUN-P If there are no startup problems or errors and the CPU was able to go into RUN, the
CPU executes the user program or runs with no load. It is possible to access the I/O.
The key cannot be removed in this position.
Programs can:
Be read out with the programming device from the CPU (CPU programming
device)
Be transferred to the CPU (programming device CPU).
RUN If there are no startup problems or errors and the CPU was able to go into RUN mode,
the CPU executes the user program or runs in no-load operation. It is possible to
access the I/O. The key can be removed in this position to ensure that the mode
cannot be changed without authorization.
Programs in the CPU can be read out with the programming device (CPU
programming device).
The program in the CPU cannot be changed when the switch is in the RUN
position.
(See STEP 7.) The protection level can be bypassed using a password set in
STEP 7/HWCONFIG (STEP 7 V4.02 and above). In other words, if you use this
password, the program can also be changed when the switch is in the RUN
position.
STOP The CPU does not process the user program. The digital signal modules are disabled.
The key can be removed in this position to ensure that the operating mode cannot be
changed without authorization.
Programs can:
Be read out with the programming device from the CPU (CPU programming
device)
Be transferred to the CPU (programming device CPU).
MRES Momentary-contact position of the key switch for the master reset of the CPU and for
(Master Reset) cold restart (see the following pages).

Protection Levels
A protection level can be defined in the CPUs of the S7-400 that can be used to
protect the programs in the CPU from unauthorized access. You can determine
with the protection level which programming device functions a user can execute
on the CPU in question without particular authorization (password). You can
execute all the programming device function using a password.

Setting the Protection Levels


You can set the protection levels (1 to 3) for a CPU under STEP 7/Configuring
Hardware.
You can remove the protection level set under STEP 7/Configuring Hardware using
a manual reset with the mode selector.
You can also set protection levels 1 and 2 using the mode selector. Table 4-3 lists
the protection levels of a CPU of the S7-400.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-19
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Table 4-3 Protection Levels of a S7-400 CPU

Protection Function Switch Position


Level
1 All programming device functions are permitted RUN-P/STOP
(default setting).
2 It is permissible to load objects from the CPU into RUN
programming device. In other words, only read
programming device functions are permitted.
Functions for process control, process monitoring
and process communication are permitted.
All information functions are permitted.
3 Functions for process control, process monitoring
and process communication are permitted.
All information functions are permitted.

If different protection levels are set with the mode selector and with STEP 7, the
higher protection level applies (3 before 2, 2 before 1).

Operating Sequence for Memory Reset


Case A: You want to download a complete, new user program to the CPU.
1. Turn the switch to the STOP position.
Result: The STOP LED lights up.
2. Turn the switch to MRES, and keep it in this position.
Result: The STOP LED is dark for a second, light for a second, dark for a
second and then remains on.
3. Turn the switch back to STOP, and then within the next 3 seconds turn it back
to MRES and then back to STOP.
Result: The STOP LED flashes for at least 3 seconds at 2 Hz (memory reset is
executed) and then lights up continuously.
Case B: When the STOP LED flashes slowly at 0.5 Hz, the CPU is requesting
a memory reset (system memory reset request, after a memory card has been
removed or inserted, for example).
Turn the switch to MRES and back to the STOP position.
Result: The STOP LED flashes for at least 3 seconds at 2 Hz (a memory reset
is executed) and then lights up continuously.
You can find the complete description of what happens during a memory reset in
the: S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controllers Installation Manual, Chapter 6.

Cold Restart
Following a cold restart, the user program starts from the beginning again. All the
data, including the retentive data, are deleted.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-20 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Restart
Following a restart, the user program resumes at the position at which it was
interrupted.
If the restart after power-on function (automatic restart) is to work, the S7-400
must have battery backup.

Reboot (Warm Restart)


Following a reboot, the user program is restarted from the beginning. The retentive
data and the contents of the data blocks are kept.

Operating Sequence at Warm Restart/Reboot/Restart


1. Turn the switch to the STOP position.
Result: The STOP LED lights up.
2. Turn the switch to the RUN/RUNP position.
Whether the CPU executes a warm restart/reboot or a restart depends on the
parameter assignment for the CPU.
Remember that the CPU 41x-4H doesnt support restarts.

Operating Sequence at Cold Restart


1. Turn the switch to the STOP position.
Result: The STOP LED lights up.
2. Turn the switch to MRES, and keep it in this position.
Result: The STOP LED is dark for a second, light for a second, dark for a
second and then remains on.
3. Turn the switch to the RUN/RUNP position.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-21
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.6 Multipoint Interface (MPI)

Connectable Devices
You can, for example, connect the following nodes to the MPI:
Programming devices (PG/PC)
Operation and monitoring devices (OPs and TDs)
Additional SIMATIC S7 programmable controllers
Some connectable devices take the 24 V supply from the interface. This voltage is
available there in a non-isolated form.

Programming Device/OP-CPU Communication


A CPU can maintain several simultaneous online connections during
communication with programming devices/OPs. By default, one of these
connections is for a programming device and one is for an OP/operation and
monitoring unit.

Communication and Interrupt Response Times

Note
The interrupt reaction times can be delayed by read and write jobs having a
maximum aggregate (approx. 460 byte).

CPU-CPU Communication
There are two types of CPU-CPU communication:
Data transfer via S7 basic communication
Data transfer via S7 communication
You can find additional information on this in the Programming with STEP 7
manual.

Connectors
Only use bus connectors with an angular outgoing cable for PROFIBUS DP and
programming device cables to connect devices to the MPI (see Installation Manual,
Chapter 7).

Multipoint Interface as DP Interface


You can also parameterize the MPI interface as a DP interface. To do this, you can
reparameterize the MPI interface under STEP 7 in SIMATIC Manager. You can use
this to set up a DP line with a maximum of 32 slaves.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-22 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.7 PROFIBUS DP Interface

Connectable Devices
You can connect the following nodes to the PROFIBUS DP interface, for example:
S7-300 as an intelligent slave (e.g. CPU 315-2 with PROFIBUS DP connection)
ET 200M (distributed station with I/O of the S7-300)
All the additional PROFIBUS DP slaves from the ET 200 system family
Other standard PROFIBUS DP slaves
Additional S7 DP masters (programming device, OP, etc.)
In this case, the CPU is either a DP master or DP slave connected via the
PROFIBUS DP field bus to the passive slave stations or other DP masters.
Some connectable devices take a supply of 24 V from the interface. This voltage is
available there in non-isolated form.

Connectors
Only use bus connectors for PROFIBUS DP and PROFIBUS cables to connect
devices to the PROFIBUS DP interface (see Installation Manual, Chapter 7).

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-23
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.8 Overview of the Parameters for the S7-400 CPUs

Default Values
All the parameters have default settings at delivery. These defaults, which are
suitable for a whole range of standard applications, mean that the S7-400 can be
used immediately without the need for further settings.
You can find the CPU-specific default values using Configuring Hardware in
STEP 7.

Parameter Blocks
The behavior and properties of the CPU are defined using parameters (stored in
system data blocks). To guarantee reproducible behavior, the CPUs have a defined
default setting. You can change this default setting by modifying the parameters.
The following list gives you an overview of the parameterizable system properties
available in the CPUs.
General properties (e.g. MPI node no.)
Startup (e.g. enabling of a restart)
Cycle/clock memory (e.g. cycle monitoring time)
Retentivity (number of memory markers, timers and counters that are kept
retentive)
Memory
Note: If, for example, you set greater or smaller values than the default values
for the process image, the number of diagnostic buffer entries and the
maximum number of ALARM-8 blocks and blocks for S7 communication, the
working memory available for the program code and for data blocks will be
reduced or increased by this amount.
Assignment of interrupts (process interrupts, delay interrupts, asynchronous
error interrupts) to the priority classes
Time-of-day interrupts (e.g. start, interval duration, priority)
Watchdog interrupts (e.g. priority, interval duration)
Diagnostics/clock (e.g. time synchronization)
Protection levels
Fault-tolerant-related parameters for the CPU 417-4H
Local data (can be set)

Note
16 memory bytes and 8 counters are kept retentive in the default setting. In other
words, they are not deleted even when the CPU is rebooted.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-24 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Parameter Assignment Tool


You can set the individual CPU parameters using Configuring Hardware in
STEP 7.

Note
If you make changes to the existing settings of the following parameters, the
operating system carries out initializations like those during cold restart.
Size of the process image of the inputs
Size of the process image of the outputs
Size of the local data
Number of diagnostic buffer inputs
Communication resources
These initializations are:
Data blocks are initialized with the load values
M, C, T, I, Q are deleted irrespective of the retentivity setting (0)
DBs generated via SFC are deleted
Hard-coded, dynamic connections are cleared down, as are
the unconfigured connections of the X/I blocks from the active
side of the connection
All the priority classes start from the beginning again

4.9 Evaluation of Process Interrupts in the S7-400H System

When you use a module that creates process interrupts in the S7-400H system, it
may be the case that the process values that can be read in the process interrupt
OB by direct access do not correspond to the process values at the time of the
interrupt. Evaluate instead the temporary variables (start information) in the
process interrupt OB.
When you use the SM 321-7BH00 module, which creates process interrupts, it is
therefore not advisable to have different responses to rising and falling edges on
one and the same input, because this would require direct access to the I/O. If you
want to respond differently to the two edge changes in your user program, apply
the signal to two inputs from different channel groups and parameterize one input
for a rising edge and the other input for a falling edge.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-25
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.10 Multicomputing

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


4.10.1 Special Features 4-28
4.10.2 Multicomputing Interrupt 4-29
4.10.3 Configuring and Programming Multicomputing Operation 4-29

What is Multicomputing Operation?


Multicomputing operation is the operation of several (max. 4)
multicomputing-capable central processing units at the same time in a central rack
(central device) of the S7-400.
The CPUs involved automatically change their modes synchronously. In other
words, they start up together and change to STOP mode together. The user
program runs on each CPU irrespective of the user programs in the other CPUs.
This makes it possible to execute controller tasks in parallel.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-26 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Example
The figure below shows a programmable controller that is working in
multicomputing mode. Each CPU can access the modules assigned to it (FM, CP,
SM).

C C C C
I I I
P P P P P
CC M M M
S U U U U
1 2 3
1 3 4 2

I CP, FM, I I CP, FM, I


EU I/O I/O
M I/O M M I/O M

L
I CP, FM, I I CP, FM, I
i I/O I/O
M I/O M M I/O M
n
e
I CP, FM, I I CP, FM, I
I/O I/O
M I/O M M I/O M

I CP, FM, I I CP, FM, I


I/O I/O
M I/O M M I/O M

Figure 4-7 Multicomputing Example

When Do You Use Multicomputing?


It is advantageous to use multicomputing in the following cases:
If your user program is too large for a single CPU and storage space is
becoming scarce, distribute your program over several CPUs.
If a certain part of your system is supposed to be processed quickly, remove
the relevant program section from the overall program and have it processed by
a separate, quick CPU.
If your system consists of several different parts that can be easily separated
from one another and can therefore be controlled relatively independently, let
CPU1 process system part 1, CPU 2 system part 2 and so on.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-27
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

The Difference Between Multicomputing Operation and Operation in the


Segmented Rack
In the segmented CR2 rack (physically segmented; cannot be done by parameter
assignment), only one CPU is allowed per segment. However, this is not
multicomputing. The CPUs in the segmented rack each make up an independent
subsystem and respond as separate processors. There is no shared logical
address area.
Multicomputing operation is not possible in the segmented rack.

4.10.1 Special Features

Slot Rules
In multicomputing operation, up to four CPUs can be inserted at the same time in a
central controller (CC) in any order.
If you use CPUs that can only handle module start addresses that are divisible by
4 (usually CPUs before 10/98), you must keep to this rule for all the configured
CPUs when you assign addresses. The rule applies should you also use CPUs
that allow the bytewise assignment of module start addresses in single-computing
operation.

Bus Connection
The CPUs are connected to one another via the communication bus (K bus). In
other words, if configured appropriately, all the CPUs can be reached by the
programming device via an MPI link.

Behavior at Startup and During Operation


At startup, the CPUs involved in multicomputing operation automatically check
whether they can synchronize with each other. Synchronization is only possible if:
All the configured CPUs (but only those) are inserted and not defective.
Correct configuration data (SDBs) have been created and loaded for all the
inserted CPUs.
If one of these prerequisites is not met, the event is entered in the diagnostic buffer
with ID 0x49A4. You can find explanations of the event IDs in the reference
information for standard and system functions (SFBs/SFCs).
When STOP mode is exited, a comparison of the types of startup (COLD
RESTART/REBOOT (WARM RESTART)/RESTART) is carried out. If their startup
type differs, the CPUs do not go into RUN mode.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-28 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Assignment of Addresses and Interrupts


In multicomputing operation, the individual CPUs can each access the modules
that were allocated to them during configuration with STEP 7. The address area of
a module is always assigned exclusively to a CPU.
An interrupt input is assigned to each CPU. Interrupts that reach this input cannot
be received by the other CPUs. The interrupt line is assigned automatically at
parameterization of the modules.
The following applies to interrupt processing:
Process interrupts and diagnostic interrupts are only sent to one CPU.
In the event of a module failure, the interrupt is processed by the CPU that was
assigned to the module at parameter assignment with STEP 7.
In the event of a rack failure, OB 86 is called on each CPU.
You can find further information on the OB 86 in the reference information on
organization blocks.

Typical I/O Application Specification


The typical I/O application specification of a programmable controller corresponds
in multicomputing operation to the typical application specification of the CPU with
the most resources. The relevant CPU-specific or DP master-specific typical
application specifications cannot be exceeded in the individual CPUs.

4.10.2 Multicomputing Interrupt

Using the multicomputing interrupt (OB 60), you can respond synchronously to an
event in multicomputing on the corresponding CPUs. In contrast to the process
interrupts triggered by signal modules, the multicomputing interrupt can be output
only by CPUs. The multicomputing interrupt is triggered by calling SFC 35
MP_ALM.
You will find more information in the System Software for S7-300/400, System and
Standard Functions manual.

4.10.3 Configuring and Programming Multicomputing Operation

Please refer to the Configuring Hardware and Communication Connections with


STEP 7 V5.1 manual to find out how to configure and program the CPUs and the
modules.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-29
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11 CPU 41x as DP Master/DP Slave

Introduction
This section contains the properties and technical specifications for the CPUs
412-1, 412-2, 414-2, 414-3, 414-4H, 416-2, 416-3, 417-4 and 417-4H that you will
require if you want to use the CPU as a DP master or as a DP slave and configure
them for direct communication.
Clarification: Because DP master/DP slave behavior is the same for all CPUs, the
CPUs are described as CPU 41x below.

Note: This description applies to CPUs as of V3.0.0 in the DPV1 environment.

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


4.11.1 DP Address Areas of the CPUs 41x 4-31
4.11.2 CPU 41x as DP Master 4-32
4.11.3 Diagnostics of the CPU 41x as DP Master 4-33
4.11.4 CPU 41x as DP Slave 4-38

Further References
You can find descriptions of and information on configuration as a whole, the
configuration of a PROFIBUS subnetwork and diagnostics in the PROFIBUS
subnetwork in the STEP 7 online help system.

Further Information
You can find descriptions and information on changing from PROFIBUS DP to
PROFIBUS DPV1 on the Internet at the following address:
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs
Under the item number 7027576

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-30 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.1 DP Address Areas of the CPUs 41x

Address Areas of the CPUs 41x

Table 4-4 CPUs 41x (MPI/DP Interface as PROFIBUS DP)

Address Area 412-1 412-2 414-2 414-4H 416-2 417-4H


MPI interface as
PROFIBUS DP, inputs and 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048
outputs (bytes) in each case
DP interface as
PROFIBUS DP, inputs and 4096 6144 6144 8192 8192
outputs (bytes) in each case
In the process image,
inputs and outputs in each
case 4096 4096 8192 8192 16384 16384
Can be set up to x bytes

Table 4-5 CPUs 41x (MPI/DP Interface and DP Module as PROFIBUS DP)

Address Area 414-3 416-3 417-4


MPI interface as
PROFIBUS DP, inputs and 2048 2048 2048
outputs (bytes) in each case
DP interface as
PROFIBUS DP, inputs and 6144 8192 8192
outputs (bytes) in each case
DP module as PROFIBUS DP,
inputs and outputs (bytes) in 6144 8192 8192
each case
In the process image,
inputs and outputs in each
case 8192 16384 16384
Can be set up to x bytes

DP diagnostic addresses occupy for the inputs in the address area one byte
each for the DP master and the DP slave. The DP standard diagnosis for each
node can be called at these addresses, for example (LADDR parameter of
SFC 13). You specify the DP diagnostic addresses at configuration. If you dont
specify any DP diagnostic addresses, STEP 7 assigns the addresses from the
highest byte address downwards as DP diagnostic addresses.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-31
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.2 CPU 41x as DP Master

Introduction
In this section we describe the features and technical specifications of the CPU if
you operate it as a DP master.
You will find the features and technical specifications of the CPUs 41x as of
Section 4.14.

Prerequisites
Is the MPI/DP interface to be a DP interface? If so, you must configure the
interface as a DP interface.
Before commissioning, you must configure the CPU as a DP master. That means
that you must do the following in STEP 7
Configure the CPU as DP master
Assign a PROFIBUS address
Assign a master diagnostic address
Integrate DP slaves in the DP master system
Is a DP slave a CPU 41x?
If it is, you will find it in the PROFIBUS DP catalog as a station that has already
been configured. Assign this DP slave CPU a slave diagnostic address in the
DP master. You must connect the DP master to the DP slave CPU and specify
the address areas for the transfer of data to the DP slave CPU.

Monitor/Modify, Programming via PROFIBUS


As an alternative to the MPI interface, you can use the PROFIBUS DP interface to
program the CPU or execute the Monitor/Modify programming device functions via
the PROFIBUS DP interface.

Note
The applications Programming and Monitor/Modify via the PROFIBUS DP
interface extend the DP cycle.

Equidistance
As of STEP7 V 5.x, you can parameterize equidistant bus cycles for PROFIBUS
subnetworks. You will find a detailed description of equidistance in the STEP7
online help system.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-32 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Power-Up of the DP Master System


Use the following parameters to set power-up monitoring of the DP master:
Transfer of the Parameters to Modules
Finished Message by Means of Modules
In other words, the DP slaves must power up and be parameterized by the CPU
(as DP master) in the set time.

PROFIBUS Address of the DP Master


All PROFIBUS addresses are permissible.

4.11.3 Diagnostics of the CPU 41x as DP Master

Diagnostics Using LEDs


Table 4-6 explains the meaning of the BUSF LED.
The BUSF LED assigned to the interface configured as the PROFIBUS DP
interface will always light up or flash.

Table 4-6 Meaning of the BUSF LED of the CPU 41x as DP Master

BUSF Meaning What to Do


Dark Configuration correct
All the configured slaves are
addressable
Flashes Bus fault (hardware fault) Check the bus cable for a short circuit or
interruption.
DP interface fault Evaluate the diagnosis. Reconfigure or correct
Different transmission rates in the configuration.
multi-DP master operation
Flashes Station failure Check whether the bus cable is connected to
the CPU 41x or whether the bus is interrupted.
Wait until the CPU 41x has powered up. If the
At least one of the assigned slaves is LED doesnt stop flashing, check the DP slaves
not addressable or evaluate the diagnosis of the DP slaves.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-33
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Reading Out the Diagnosis with STEP 7

Table 4-7 Reading Out the Diagnosis with STEP 7

DP Master Block or Tab Application Refer To...


in STEP 7
CPU 41x DP slave To display the slave diagnosis See the section on hardware
diagnostics tab as plain text at the STEP 7 user diagnostics in the STEP 7 online
interface help system and the STEP 7 user
guide
SFC 13 To read out the slave diagnosis Configuration for CPU 41x, see
DPNRM_DG (store in the data area of the Section 4.11.9; SFC see the
user program) System and Standard Functions
Reference Manual Configuration
for other slaves, see their
description
SFC 59 To read out data records of the
RD_REC S7 diagnosis (store in the data
area of the user program)
SFC 51 To read out SSL sublists. Call
RDSYSST SFC 51 in the diagnostic
interrupt using the SSL ID
W#16#00B3 and read out the
SSL of the slave CPU.
SFB 52 Applies to the DPV1 See the System and Standard
RDREC environment: Functions Reference Manual
To read out data records of the
S7 diagnosis (store in the data
area of the user program)
SFB 54 Applies to the DPV1
RALRM environment:
To read out interrupt information
within the associated interrupt
OB

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-34 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Evaluating the Diagnosis in the User Program


The following figure shows you how to evaluate the diagnosis in the user program.

CPU 41x
Diagnostic event

OB82 is called

Read out OB82_MDL_ADDR For the diagnosis of the relevant


and components:
Read out OB82_IO_FLAG Call SFB 54 (in the DPV1
(= input/output module identifier) environment)

MODE= set 1
Enter bit 0 of the OB82_IO_Flag as
Diagnostic data are entered in the
bit 15 in OB82_MDL_ADDR
Result: Diagnostic address TINFO and
OB82_MDL_ADDR* AINFO parameters.

For the diagnosis of the whole DP slave: For the diagnosis of the relevant modules:
Call SFC 13 Call SFC 51
 
Enter the diagnostic address Enter the diagnostic address OB82_MDL_ADDR*
OB82_MDL_ADDR* in the LADDR parameter in the INDEX parameter
Enter the ID W#16#00B3 in the SZL_ID parameter
(= diagnostic data of a module)

Figure 4-8 Diagnostics with CPU 41x

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-35
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Diagnostic Addresses in Connection with DP Slave Functionality


You assign diagnostic addresses for the PROFIBUS DP in the CPU 41x. Ensure
during configuration that DP diagnostic addresses are assigned once to the DP
master and once to the DP slave.

S7 CPU as DP master S7 CPU as DP slave

PROFIBUS

Specify two diagnostic addresses during configuration:

Diagnostic address Diagnostic address

During the configuration of the DP During the configuration of the DP slave,


master, you specify (in the associated you also specify (in the associated
project of the DP master) a diagnostic project of the DP slave) a diagnostic
address for the DP slave. In the address that is assigned to the DP slave.
following, this diagnostic address is In the following, this diagnostic address
described as being assigned to the DP is described as being assigned to the
master. DP slave.
By means of this diagnostic address the By means of this diagnostic address the
DP master receives information on the DP slave receives information on the
status of the DP slave or a bus status of the DP master or a bus
interruption (see also Table 4-8). interruption (see also Table 4-12).

Figure 4-9 Diagnostic Addresses for the DP Master and DP Slave

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-36 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Event Detection
Table 4-8 shows you how the CPU 41x as DP master detects any changes in the
operating mode of a CPU as DP slave or interruptions in data transfer.

Table 4-8 Event Detection of the CPUs 41x as DP Master

Event What Happens in the DP Master


Bus OB 86 called with the message Station failure
interruption (incoming event;
(short circuit, diagnostic address of the DP slave that is assigned to the DP master)
connector In the case of I/O access: OB 122
removed) called (I/O access error)
DP slave: OB 82 is called with the message Faulty module
RUN STOP (incoming event; diagnostic address of the DP slave that is assigned
to the DP master; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP slave: OB 82 is called with the message Module ok.
STOP RUN (outgoing event; diagnostic address of the DP slave that is assigned
to the DP master; Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=0)

Evaluation in the User Program


The following table shows you how, for example, you can evaluate RUN-STOP
transitions of the DP slave in the DP master (see also Table 4-8).

In the DP Master In the DP Slave (CPU 41x)


Diagnostic addresses: (example) Diagnostic addresses: (example)
Master diagnostic address=1023 Slave diagnostic address=422
Slave diagnostic address in the master Master diagnostic address=not relevant
system=1022

The CPU calls OB 82 with the following CPU: RUN STOP


information, amongst other things: CPU generates a DP slave diagnostic frame
OB 82_MDL_ADDR:=1022 (see Section 4.11.9).
OB82_EV_CLASS:=B#16#39
(incoming event)
OB82_MDL_DEFECT:=module
malfunction
Tip: This information is also in the diagnostic
buffer of the CPU
You should also program the SFC 13
DPNRM_DG in the user program to read
out the DP slave diagnostic data.
We recommend you use SFB 54 in the DPV1
environment. It outputs the interrupt
information in its entirety.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-37
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.4 CPU 41x as DP Slave

Introduction
In this section we describe the features and technical specifications of the CPU if
you operate it as a DP slave.
You can find the features and technical specifications of the CPUs 41x as of
Section 4.14.

Prerequisites

4. The CPUs 41x-4H can not be used as slaves.

5. Only one DP interface of a CPU can be configured as a DP slave.

6. Is the MPI/DP interface to be a DP interface? If so, you must configure the


interface as a DP interface.
Before commissioning you must configure the CPU as a DP slave. In other
words, you must do the following in STEP 7
Activate the CPU as a DP slave
Assign a PROFIBUS address
Assign a slave diagnostic address
Define the address areas for data transfer to the DP master

DDB Files
You need a DDB file to configure the CPU as a DP slave in a third-party system.
You can obtain the DDB file on the Internet at http://www.ad.siemens.de/csi_e/gsd.
You can also download the DDB file from the mailbox of the Interface Center in
Frth on +49 (911) 797372.

Configuration and Parameter Assignment Frame


When you configure/parameterize the CPU 41x, you are supported by STEP 7. If
you require a description of the configuration and parameter assignment frame to
carry out a check with a bus monitor, for example, you will find it on the Internet at
http://www.ad.siemens.de/simatic-cs under the ID 996685

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-38 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Monitor/Modify, Programming via PROFIBUS


As an alternative to the MPI interface, you can use the PROFIBUS DP interface to
program the CPU or execute the programming device functions Monitor and
Modify. To do this, you must enable these functions when you configure the CPU
as DP slave in STEP 7.

Note
The use of Programming or Monitor and Modify via the PROFIBUS DP interface
extends the DP cycle.

Data Transfer Via an Intermediate Memory


As a DP slave the CPU 41x makes an intermediate memory available to
PROFIBUS DP. Data transfer between the CPU as DP slave and the DP master
always takes place via this intermediate memory. You can configure up to
32 address areas for this.
In other words, the DP master writes its data in these address areas of the
intermediate memory and the CPU reads the data in the user program and vice
versa.

DP master CPU 41x as DP slave

Intermediate I/O I/O


memory in the I/O
address area

PROFIBUS

Figure 4-10 Intermediate Memory in the CPU 41x as DP Slave

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-39
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Address Areas of the Intermediate Memory


Configure in STEP 7 the input and output address areas:
You can configure up to 32 input and output address areas
Each of these address areas can be up to 32 bytes in size
You can configure a maximum of 244 bytes of inputs and 244 bytes of outputs
in total
The following table shows you the principle behind the address areas. You will also
find this in STEP 7 (configuration).

Table 4-9 Configuration Example for the Address Areas of the Intermediate Memory

Type Master Type Slave Length Unit Consistency


Address Address
1 E 222 A 310 2 Byte Unit
2 A 0 E 13 10 Word Total length
:
32
Address areas in Address areas in These parameters of the address
the DP master CPU the DP slave CPU areas must be the same for the DP
master and DP slave

Rules
You must adhere to the following rules when working with the intermediate
memory:
Assignment of the address areas:
Input data of the DP slave are always output data of the DP master
Output data of the DP slave are always input data of the DP master
You can assign the addresses as you choose. You access the data in the user
program with load/transfer commands or with SFCs 14 and 15. You can also
specify addresses from the process-image input/output table (see also Section
4.11.1).

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-40 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Note
You assign addresses for the intermediate memory from the DP address area of
the CPU 41x.
You must not reassign the addresses you have already assigned to the
intermediate memory to the I/O modules on the CPU 41x.

The lowest address in each address area is the start address of that address
area.
The length, unit and consistency of address areas for the DP master and DP
slave that belong together must be the same.

S5 DP Master
If you use an IM 308 C as a DP master and the CPU 41x as a DP slave, the
following applies to the exchange of consistent data:
You must program FB 192 in the IM 308-C so that consistent data can be
transferred between the DP master and DP slave. The data of the CPU 41x are
only output or displayed contiguously in a block with FB 192.

S5-95 as DP Master
If you use an AG S5-95 as a DP master, you must also set its bus parameters for
the CPU 41x as DP slave.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-41
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Sample Program
The small program example below illustrates data transfer between the DP master
and DP slave. This example contains the addresses from Table 4-9.

In the DP Slave CPU In the DP Master CPU


L 2 Preprocess data
T MB 6 in the DP slave
L EB 0
T MB 7
L MW 6 Transfer data to
T PQW 310 the DP master
L PIB 222 Continue to
T MB 50 process received
L PIB 223 data in the DP
L B#16#3 master
+ I
T MB 51
L 10 Preprocess data
+ 3 in the DP master
T MB 60
CALL SFC 15 Send data to the
LADDR:= W#16#0 DP slave
RECORD:= P#M60.0 Byte20
RET_VAL:= MW 22
CALL SFC 14 Receive data
LADDR:=W#16#D from the DP
RET_VAL:=MW 20 master
RECORD:=P#M30.0 Byte20

L MB 30 Continue to
L MB 7 process received
+ I data
T MW 100

Data Transfer in STOP Mode


The DP slave CPU goes into STOP mode: The data in the intermediate memory of
the CPU are overwritten with 0. In other words, the DP master reads 0.
The DP master goes into STOP mode: The current data in the intermediate
memory of the CPU are retained and can continue to be read by the CPU.

PROFIBUS Address
You cannot set 126 as PROFIBUS address for the CPU 41x as DP slave.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-42 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.5 Diagnostics of the CPU 41x as DP Slave

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


4.11.6 Diagnostics Using LEDs 4-44
4.11.7 Diagnostics with STEP 5 or STEP 7 4-44
4.11.8 Reading Out the Diagnosis 4-45
4.11.9 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis 4-49
4.11.10 Station Statuses 1 to 3 4-50
4.11.11 Master PROFIBUS Address 4-52
4.11.12 Manufacturer ID 4-52
4.11.13 Module Diagnosis 4-53
4.11.14 Station Diagnosis 4-54
4.11.15 Interrupts 4-56

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-43
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.6 Diagnostics Using LEDs

Diagnostics using LEDs CPU 41x


Table 4-10 explains the meaning of the BUSF LEDs.
The BUSF LED assigned to the interface configured as the PROFIBUS DP
interface will always light up or flash.

Table 4-10 Meaning of the BUSF LEDs of the CPU 41x as DP Slave

BUSF Meaning What to Do


Dark Configuration correct
Flashes The CPU 41x is incorrectly Check the CPU 41x.
parameterized. There is no data Check to make sure that the bus connector is
interchange between the DP master and properly inserted.
the CPU 41x.
Check whether the bus cable to the DP master
Causes: has been interrupted.
The response monitoring time has Check the configuration and parameter
expired. assignment.
Bus communication via
PROFIBUS DP has been interrupted.
The PROFIBUS address is incorrect.
On Bus short circuit Check the bus setup.

4.11.7 Diagnostics with STEP 5 or STEP 7

Slave Diagnosis
The slave diagnosis complies with the EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS standard.
Depending on the DP master, it can be read out with STEP 5 or STEP 7 for all DP
slaves that comply with the standard.
The display and structure of the slave diagnosis is described in the following
sections.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-44 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

S7 Diagnosis
An S7 diagnosis can be requested for all diagnostics-capable modules in the
SIMATIC S7/M7 range of modules in the user program. You can find out which
modules have diagnostic capability in the module information or in the catalog. The
structure of the S7 diagnostic data is the same for both central and distributed
modules.
The diagnostic data of a module is in data records 0 and 1 of the system data area
of the module. Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data describing the
current status of a module. Data record 1 also contains module-specific diagnostic
data.
You will find the structure of the diagnostic data described in the Standard and
System Functions Reference Manual.

4.11.8 Reading Out the Diagnosis

Table 4-11 Reading Out the Diagnostic Data with STEP 5 and STEP 7 in the Master System

Programmable Block or Tab Application Refer To...


Controller with DP in STEP 7
Master
SIMATIC S7/M7 DP slave To display the slave diagnosis as See the section on
diagnostics tab plain text at the STEP 7 user hardware diagnostics in
interface the STEP 7 online help
system and in the STEP 7
user guide
SFC 13 To read out the slave diagnosis Configuration, see Section
DP NRM_DG (store in the data area of the user 4.11.9; SFC see the
program) System and Standard
Functions Reference
Manual
SFC 51 To read out SSL sublists.
RDSYSST Call SFC 51 in the diagnostic
interrupt using the SSL ID
W#16#00B3 and read out the See the System and
SSL of the slave CPU. Standard Functions
Reference Manual
SFB 54 Applies to the DPV1
RDREC environment: To read out
interrupt information within the
associated interrupt OB
FB 99/FC 99 To evaluate slave diagnosis The Internet page
http://www.ad.siemens.de/
simatic-cs
ID 387 257

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-45
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Table 4-11 Reading Out the Diagnostic Data with STEP 5 and STEP 7 in the Master System, continued

Programmable Block or Tab Application Refer To...


Controller with DP in STEP 7
Master
SIMATIC S5 with FB 192 To read out the slave diagnosis For the structure, see
IM 308-C as DP IM308C (store in the data area of the user Section 4.11.9; FBs see
master program) the ET 200 Distributed
I/O System manual
SIMATIC S5 with SFB 230
S5-95U programmable S_DIAG
controller as DP
master

Example of Reading Out the Slave Diagnosis with FB 192 IM 308C


Here you will find an example of how to use FB 192 to read out the slave diagnosis
for a DP slave in the STEP 5 user program.

Assumptions
The following assumptions apply to this STEP 5 user program:
The IM 308-C is assigned pages 0 to 15 (number 0 of the IM 308-C) as the DP
master.
The DP slave has the PROFIBUS address 3.
The slave diagnosis is to be stored in DB 20. However, you can also use any
other data block for this.
The slave diagnosis consists of 26 bytes.

STEP 5 User Program

STL Description
:A DB 30
:JU FB 192
Name :IM308C
DPAD : KH F800 Default address area of the IM 308-C
IMST : KY 0, 3 IM No. = 0, PROFIBUS address of DP slave = 3
FCT : KC SD Function: Read slave diagnosis
GCGR : KM 0 Not evaluated
TYP : KY 0, 20 S5 data area: DB 20
STAD : KF +1 Diagnostic data from data word 1
LENG : KF 26 Length of diagnosis = 26 bytes
ERR : DW 0 Error code stored in DW 0 of DB 30

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-46 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Diagnostic Addresses in Connection with DP Master Functionality


You assign diagnostic addresses for PROFIBUS DP with the CPU 41x. Ensure
during configuration that DP diagnostic addresses are assigned once to the DP
master and once to the DP slave.

S7-CPU as DP master S7-CPU as DP slave

PROFIBUS

You specify two diagnostic addresses during configuration:

Diagnostic address Diagnostic address

During the configuration of the DP During the configuration of the DP slave,


master, you specify (in the associated you also specify (in the associated
project of the DP master) a diagnostic project of the DP slave) a diagnostic
address for the DP slave. In the address that is assigned to the DP slave.
following, this diagnostic address is In the following, this diagnostic address
described as being assigned to the DP is described as being assigned to the
master. DP slave.
By means of this diagnostic address the By means of this diagnostic address the
DP master receives information on the DP slave receives information on the
status of the DP slave or a bus status of the DP master or a bus
interruption (see also Table 4-8). interruption (see also Table 4-12).

Figure 4-11 Diagnostic Addresses for the DP Master and DP Slave

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-47
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Event Detection
Table 4-12 shows you how the CPU 41x as DP slave detects any operating mode
changes or interruptions in data transfer.

Table 4-12 Event Detection of the CPUs 41x as DP Slave

Event What Happens in the DP Slave


Bus interruption OB 86 is called with the message Station failure
(short circuit, (incoming event; diagnostic address of the DP slave that is
connector removed) assigned to the DP slave)
In the case of I/O access: Call of OB 122
(I/O access error)
DP master: OB 82 is called with the message Faulty module
RUN STOP (incoming event;
diagnostic address of the DP slave that is assigned to the
DP slave;
Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=1)
DP master: OB 82 is called with the message Module ok.
STOP RUN (outgoing event;
diagnostic address of the DP slave that is assigned to the
DP slave;
Variable OB82_MDL_STOP=0)

Evaluation in the User Program


The following table 4-13 shows you, for example, how you can evaluate
RUN-STOP transitions of the DP master in the DP slave (see also Table 4-12).

Table 4-13 Evaluation of RUN-STOP Transitions in the DP Master/DP Slave

In the DP Master In the DP Slave


Diagnostic addresses: (example) Diagnostic addresses: (example)
Master diagnostic address=1023 Slave diagnostic address=422
Slave diagnostic address in the master Master diagnostic address=not relevant
system=1022

CPU: RUN STOP The CPU calls OB 82 with the following


information, amongst other things:
OB 82_MDL_ADDR:=422
OB82_EV_CLASS:=B#16#39
(incoming event)
OB82_MDL_DEFECT:=module
malfunction
Tip: This information is also in the diagnostic
buffer of the CPU

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-48 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.9 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis

Structure of the Slave Diagnosis

Byte 0
Byte 1 Station statuses 1 to 3
Byte 2

Byte 3 Master PROFIBUS address

Byte 4 High byte


Manufacturer ID
Byte 5 Low byte

Byte 6 Module diagnosis


to . (The length depends on the
Byte x . number of configured address
. areas in the intermediate
memory1)

Byte x+1 Station diagnosis


to .
(The length depends on the
Byte y .
number of configured address
.
areas in the intermediate
memory)

1 Exception: In the case of invalid configuration of the DP master, the


DP slave interprets 35 configured address areas (46H).

Figure 4-12 Structure of the Slave Diagnosis

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-49
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.10 Station Statuses 1 to 3

Definition
Station status 1 to 3 provides an overview of the status of a DP slave.

Station Status 1

Table 4-14 Structure of Station Status 1 (Byte 0)

Bit Meaning What to Do


0 1: The DP slave cannot be addressedby Correct DP address set on the DP slave?
the DP master. Bus connector connected?
Voltage at DP slave?
RS 485 repeater set correctly?
Execute reset on the DP slave
1 1: The DP slave is not yet ready for data Wait while the DP slave powers up.
transfer.
2 1: The configuration data sent by the DP Correct station type or correct configuration of
master to the DP slave does not the DP slave entered in the software?
correspond to the actual configuration of
the DP slave.
3 1: Diagnostic interrupt, triggered by You can read out the diagnosis.
RUN-STOP transition of the CPU
0: Diagnostic interrupt, triggered by
STOP-RUN transition of the CPU
4 1: The function is not supported (for Check the configuration.
example, changing the DP address via
software)
5 0: The bit is always 0.
6 1: The DP slave type does not correspond Correct station type entered in the software?
to the software configuration. (Parameter assignment error)
7 1: Parameters have been assigned to the The bit is always 1 when you are accessing the
DP slave by a different DP master to the DP slave using the programming device or
one that currently has access to the DP another DP master, for example.
slave. The DP address of the parameter assignment
master is in the master PROFIBUS address
diagnostic byte.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-50 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Station Status 2

Table 4-15 Structure of Station Status 2 (Byte 1)

Bit Meaning
0 1: The DP slave must be reparameterized and reconfigured.
1 1: A diagnostic message has been issued. The DP slave cannot continue until the
problem has been corrected (static diagnostic message).
2 1: The bit is always set to 1 if the DP slave with this DP address is present.
3 1: Response monitoring is enabled for this DP slave.
4 0: The bit is always at 0.
5 0: The bit is always at 0.
6 0: The bit is always at 0.
7 1: The DP slave is disabled that is, it has been removed from cyclic processing.

Station Status 3

Table 4-16 Structure of Station Status 3 (Byte 2)

Bit Meaning
0
to 0: The bits are always at 0.
6
7 1: There are more diagnostic messages than the DP slave can store.
The DP master cannot enter all the diagnostic messages sent by the DP
slave in its diagnostic buffer.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-51
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.11 Master PROFIBUS Address

Definition
The master PROFIBUS address diagnostic byte contains the DP address of the
DP master that:
Parameterized the DP slave and
Has read and write access to the DP slave

Master PROFIBUS Address

Table 4-17 Structure of the Master PROFIBUS Address (Byte 3)

Bit Meaning
0 to 7 DP address of the DP master that parameterized the DP slave and has read
and write access to the DP slave.
FFH: DP slave has not been parameterized by any DP master.

4.11.12 Manufacturer ID

Definition
The manufacturer ID contains a code that describes the type of the DP slave.

Manufacturer ID

Table 4-18 Structure of the Manufacturer ID (Bytes 4, 5)

Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer ID for CPU


80H C5H 412-1
80H C6H 412-2
80H C7H 414-2
80H C8H 414-3
80H CAH 416-2
80H CBH 416-3
80H CCH 417-4

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-52 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.13 Module Diagnosis

Definition
The module diagnosis tells you for which of the configured address areas of the
intermediate memory an entry has been made.

7 0 Bit no.
Byte 6 0 1

Length of the module diagnosis


incl. byte 6 (depends on the number of configured address areas up to
6 bytes)
Code for module diagnosis
7 6 5 4 3 1 Bit no.
Byte 7

Preset config.actual config.


Setpoint actual configuration and slave CPU in STOP
Preset config.actual config.
Entry for 1st configured address area
Entry for 2nd configured address area
Entry for 3rd configured address area
Entry for 4th configured address area
Entry for 5th configured address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte 8

Entry for 6th to 13th configured address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte 9

Entry for 14th to 21st configured address area


7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte 10

Entry for 22nd to 29th configured address area

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit no.
Byte 11 0 0 0 0 0

Entry for 30th configured address area


Entry for 31st configured address area
Entry for 32nd configured address area

Figure 4-13 Structure of the Module Diagnosis of the CPU 41x

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-53
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.14 Station Diagnosis

Definition
The station diagnosis provides detailed information on a DP slave. The station
diagnosis starts as of byte x and can include up to 20 bytes.

Station Diagnosis
The figure below illustrates the structure and contents of the bytes for a configured
address area of the intermediate memory.

7 6 0 Bit no.
Byte x 0 0

Length of the station diagnosis


incl. byte x (= max. 20 bytes)
Code for station diagnosis

Byte x+1 01H: Code for diagnostic interrupt


02H: Code for process interrupt
7 0
Byte x +2 Number of the configured address
area of the intermediate memory
The following applies: Number+3
(example:
CPU = 02H
1st address area = 04H
2nd address area = 05H and so on)

Byte x +3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Fixed to 0)

Byte x +4
to Diagnostic data (see Figure 4-15)
byte x +7 and
interrupt data

Figure 4-14 Structure of the Station Diagnosis

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-54 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

As of byte x +4
The meaning of the bytes as of byte x+4 depends on byte x +1 (see Figure 4-14).

In Byte x +1, the Code Stands for:


Diagnostic Interrupt (01H) Process Interrupt (02H)
The diagnostic data contain the 16 byte status You can program 4 bytes of interrupt information
information of the CPU. Figure 4-15 shows you the any way you wish for the process interrupt. You
assignment of the first 4 bytes of the diagnostic transfer these 4 bytes to the DP master in STEP 7
data. The following 12 bytes are always 0. using SFC 7 DP_PRAL
(see Section 4.11.15).

Bytes x+4 to x+7 for Diagnostic Interrupts


Figure 4-15 illustrates the structure and contents of bytes x +4 to x +7 for the
diagnostic interrupt. The contents of these bytes correspond to the contents of
data record 0 of the diagnosis in STEP 7 (in this case not all the bits are assigned).

7 0 Bit no.
Byte x +4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0: Module ok.
1: Faulty module

7 4 3 0 Bit no.
Byte x +5 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

Identifier for address area of the


intermediate memory (constant)
7 2 0 Bit no.
Byte x +6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0: RUN mode
1: STOP mode

7 0 Bit no.
Byte x +7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Figure 4-15 Bytes +4 to +7 for Diagnostic and Process Interrupts

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-55
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.11.15 Interrupts

Interrupts with the S7/M7 DP Master


In the CPU 41x as a DP slave you can trigger a process interrupt in the DP master
from the user program. You can trigger an OB 40 in the user program of the DP
master by calling SFC 7 DP_PRAL. Using SFC 7 you can forward interrupt
information in a double word to the DP master, which you can evaluate in OB 40 in
the OB40_POINT_ADDR variable. You can program the interrupt information as
you choose. You will find a detailed description of SFC 7 DP_PRAL in the System
Software for S7-300/400, System and Standard Functions Reference Manual.

Interrupts with Another DP Master


If you are running the CPU 41x with another DP master, these interrupts are
reflected in the station diagnosis of the CPU 41x. You have to process the relevant
diagnostic events in the DP masters user program.

Note
Note the following in order to be able to evaluate diagnostic interrupts and process
interrupts by means of the station diagnosis when using a different DP master:
The DP master should be able to store the diagnostic messages; in other
words, the diagnostic messages should be stored in a ring buffer in the DP
master. If the DP master could not store the diagnostic messages, only the last
diagnostic message received would be available for evaluation, for example.
You must query the relevant bits in the station diagnosis at regular intervals in
your user program. You must also take the PROFIBUS DP bus cycle time into
consideration so that you can query the bits at least once synchronously with
the bus cycle time, for example.
You cannot use process interrupts in the station diagnosis with an IM 308-C as
the DP master, because only incoming and not outgoing interrupts are
reported.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-56 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.12 Direct Communication

You can configure direct communication for PROFIBUS nodes as of STEP 7 V 5.x.
The CPU 41x can take part in direct communication as the sender or recipient.
Direct communication represents a special type of communication relationship
between PROFIBUS DP nodes.

Principle
Direct communication is characterized by the fact that PROFIBUS DP nodes
listen in to find out which data a DP slave is sending back to its DP master.
By means of this mechanism the eavesdropper (recipient) can access changes to
the input data of remote DP slaves directly.
During configuration in STEP 7, you specify by means of the relevant I/O input
addresses the address area of the recipient to which the required data of the
sender are to be read.
A CPU 41x can be:
Sender as a DP slave
Recipient as a DP slave or a DP master or as a CPU that is not
integrated in a master system (see Figure 4-16).

Example
Figure 4-16 uses an example to illustrate which direct communication
relationships you can configure. All the DP masters and DP slaves in the figure
are CPUs 41x. Note that other DP slaves (ET 200M, ET 200X, ET 200S) can only
be senders.

DP master DP master
system 1 system 2
CPU 41x as CPU 41x as
CPU 41x-2
DP master 1 DP master 2

PROFIBUS

DP slave 3 CPU 41x DP slave 5


CPU 41x CPU 41x as
as as DP slave 4
DP slave 1 DP slave 2

Figure 4-16 Direct Communication with CPUs 41x

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-57
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.13 Diagnostics in Direct Communication

Diagnostic Addresses
In direct communication you assign a diagnostic address in the recipient:

S7-CPU as sender S7-CPU as recipient

PROFIBUS

Diagnostic address

During configuration you specify a


diagnostic address in the recipient that is
assigned to the sender.
By means of this diagnostic address the
recipient obtains information on the
status of the sender or a bus interruption
(see also Table 4-19).

Figure 4-17 Diagnostic Address for the Recipient During Direct Communication

Event Detection
Table 4-19 shows you how the CPU 41x as recipient detects interruptions in data
transfer.

Table 4-19 Event Detection of the CPUs 41x as Recipient During Direct Communication

Event What Happens in the Recipient


Bus interruption OB 86 is called with the message Station failure
(short circuit, plug (incoming event; diagnostic address of the recipient assigned
removed) to the sender)
In the case of I/O access: Call of OB 122 (I/O access error)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-58 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Evaluation in the User Program


The following table 4-20 shows you, for example, how you can evaluate a sender
station failure in the recipient (see also Table 4-19).

Table 4-20 Evaluation of the Station Failure in the Sender During Direct Communication

In the Sender In the Recipient


Diagnostic addresses: (example) Diagnostic address: (example)
Master diagnostic address=1023 Diagnostic address=444
Slave diagnostic address in the master
system=1022

Station failure The CPU calls OB 86 with the following


information, amongst other things:
OB 86_MDL_ADDR:=444
OB86_EV_CLASS:=B#16#38
(incoming event)
OB86_FLT_ID:=B#16#C4
(failure of a DP station)
Tip: This information is also in the diagnostic
buffer of the CPU

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-59
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.14 Technical Specifications of the CPU 412-1;


(6ES7 412-1XF03-0AB0)

CPU and Version Timers/Counters and Their Retentivity


MLFB 6ES7 412-1XF03-0AB0 S7 counters 256
Hardware version 05 Retentivity can be set From Z 0 to Z 255
Firmware version V 3.0.0 Preset From Z 0 to Z 7
Associated programming As of STEP7 V 5.1; Counting range 1 to 999
package ServicePack 2
IEC counter Yes
Memory
Type SFB
Working memory
S7 timers 256
Integrated 48 Kbytes for program
Retentivity can be set From T 0 to T 255
48 Kbytes for data
Preset No retentive timers
Expandable No
Time range 10 ms to 9990 s
Load memory
IEC timers Yes
Integrated 256 Kbytes RAM
Expandable FEPROM With memory card (FLASH)
Type SFB
up to 64 Mbytes Data Areas and Their Retentivity
Expandable RAM With memory card (RAM) Total retentive data area Total working and load
up to 64 Mbytes (incl. memory markers, memory (with backup
timers, counters) battery)
Backup Yes
With battery All data Memory markers 4 Kbytes

Without battery None Retentivity can be set From MB 0 to MB 4095

Processing Times Preset retentivity From MB 0 to MB 15

Processing times for Clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)

Bit operations Min. 0.2 s Data blocks Max. 511 (DB 0 reserved)

Word instructions Min. 0.2 s Size Max. 48 Kbytes

Integer math Min. 0.2 s Local data (can be set) Max. 8 Kbytes
instructions Preset 4 Kbytes
Floating-point math Min. 0.6 s
instructions

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-60 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Blocks Number of plug-in S5 Max. 6


modules via adapter casing
OBs See instruction list
(in the central rack)
Size Max. 48 Kbytes
Operable function modules
Nesting depth and communication
processors
Per priority class 24
Additionally in an error 2
FM Limited by the number of
slots and the number of
OB
connections
FBs Max. 256
CP, point-to-point Limited by the number of
Size Max. 48 Kbytes slots and the number of
connections
FCs Max. 256
Size Max. 48 Kbytes
CP, LAN Max. 14
Time
Address Areas (Inputs/Outputs)
Clock Yes
Total I/O address area 4 Kbytes/4 Kbytes
Of which distributed
Buffered Yes

MPI/DP interface 2 Kbytes/2 Kbytes


Resolution 1 ms

DP interface 2 Kbytes/2 Kbytes


Accuracy at
Power off Deviation per day 1.7 s
Process Image 4 Kbytes/4 Kbytes (can be
set) Power on Deviation per day 8.6 s
Preset 128 bytes/128 bytes Runtime meter 8
Number of partial Max. 8 Number 0 to 7
process images
Value Range 0 to 32767 hours
Consistent data Max. 244 bytes
Granularity 1 hour
Digital channels 32768/32768
Retentive Yes
Of which central 32768/32768
Time synchronization Yes
Analog channels 2048/2048
In the PLC Master/slave
Of which central 2048/2048
On MPI Master/slave
Configuration
Central racks/expansion Max. 1/21
units
Multicomputing Max. 4 CPUs
(with UR1 or UR2)
Number of plug-in IMs Max. 6
(overall)
IM 460 Max. 6
IM 463 Max. 6
Number of DP masters
Integrated 1
Via interface None
submodule
Via IM Max. 4
Via CP Max. 10
IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-61
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

S7 Message Functions Communication Functions


Number of stations that can Max. 8 Programming device/OP Yes
log on for message communication
functions (e.g. OS)
Global data communication Yes
SCAN procedure Yes
Number of GD
Number of additional 1 packages
values per message
Sender Max. 8
With 100 ms grid None
Recipient Max. 16
With 500, 1000 ms 1
grid
Size of GD packages Max. 64 bytes
Of which consistent 32 bytes
Number of messages
Overall Max. 512 S7 basic communication Yes
100 ms grid None User data per job Max. 76 bytes
500 ms grid Max. 256 Of which consistent 16 bytes
1000 ms grid Max. 256 S7 communication Yes
Process diagnostic Yes User data per job Max. 64 Kbytes
messages
Of which consistent 32 bytes
Simultaneously active Max. 70
ALARM-S blocks S5-compatible Yes (via CP and loadable
communication FC)
Process control reports Yes
User data per job Max. 8 Kbytes
ALARM-8 blocks Yes
Of which consistent 240 bytes
Number of instances Max. 300
for ALARM-8 blocks Standard communication Yes (via CP and loadable
and blocks for S7 FC)
communication (can be User data per job Depends on CP
set)
Of which consistent Depends on CP
Preset 150
Number of connection 16
Number of archive IDs that 4 resources
can log on at the same time
Interfaces
Test and Startup Functions
1st Interface
Monitor/modify variable Yes
Type of interface Integrated interface
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory submodule
markers, DB, distributed
inputs/outputs, timers, Physical RS 485
counters Isolated Yes
Number of variables Max. 70 Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
Force Yes (15 VDC to 30 VDC)

Variables Inputs/outputs, memory Number of connection MPI: 16


markers, distributed resources DP: 16
inputs/outputs Functionality
Number of variables Max. 64 MPI Yes
Status block Yes PROFIBUS DP DP master
Single sequence Yes Point-to-point No
Diagnostic buffer Yes connection

Number of entries Max. 200 (can be set)


Preset 120

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-62 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

MPI Programming
Utilities Programming language LAD, FBD, STL, SCL
Programming Yes Instruction set See instruction list
device/OP
Bracket levels 8
communication
System functions (SFC) See instruction list
Routing Yes
Number of SFCs active at
Global data Yes
the same time
communication
S7 basic Yes
WR_REC 8
communication WR_PARM 8
S7 communication Yes PARM_MOD 1
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps WR_DPARM 2
DP Master DPNRM_DG 8
Utilities RDSYSST 1 to 8
Programming Yes System function blocks See instruction list
device/OP (SFB)
communication
Number of SFBs active at
Routing Yes
the same time
Equidistance Yes
RD_REC 8
SYNC/FREEZE Yes
WR_REC 8
Enable/disable DP Yes
slaves User program protection Password protection
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps Dimensions
Number of DP slaves Max. 32 Installation dimensions 25290219
WHD (mm)
Address area Max. 2 Kbytes I /
2 Kbytes O Slots required 1
User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I / Weight Approx. 0.72 kg
244 bytes O
Voltages, Currents
DP Slave Supply voltage Rated value 24 VDC
Utilities
Current consumption from Typ. 1.5 A
Monitor/modify; Yes, if the interface is active S7-400 bus (5 VDC) Max. 1.6 A
programming;
routing Current consumption from Max. 0.15 A
DDB file http://www.ad.siemens.de/c S7-400 bus (24 VDC)
si_e/gsd Backup current Typ. 40 A
Transmission rate Up to 12 Mbps Max. 300 A
Intermediate memory 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O Incoming supply of external 5 VDC to 15 VDC
backup voltage to the CPU
Address areas Max. 32 with a max. of 32
bytes each Power loss Typ. 8 W

CPU as DP Slave
You can only configure the CPU once as a DP slave even if the CPU has several
interfaces.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-63
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.15 Technical Specifications of the CPU 412-2;


(6ES7 412-2XG00-0AB0)

CPU and Version Timers/Counters and Their Retentivity


MLFB 6ES7 412-2XG00-0AB0 S7 counters 256
Hardware version 05 Retentivity can be set From Z 0 to Z 255
Firmware version V 3.0.0 Preset From Z 0 to Z 7
Associated programming As of STEP7 V 5.1; Counting range 1 to 999
package ServicePack 2
IEC counter Yes
Memory
Type SFB
Working memory
S7 timers 256
Integrated 72 Kbytes for program
Retentivity can be set From T 0 to T 255
72 Kbytes for data
Preset No retentive timers
Expandable No
Time range 10 ms to 9990 s
Load memory
IEC timers Yes
Integrated 256 Kbytes RAM
Expandable FEPROM With memory card (FLASH)
Type SFB
up to 64 Mbytes Data Areas and Their Retentivity
Expandable RAM With memory card (RAM) Total retentive data area Total working and load
up to 64 Mbytes (incl. memory markers, memory (with backup
timers, counters) battery)
Backup Yes
With battery All data Memory markers 4 Kbytes

Without battery None Retentivity can be set From MB 0 to MB 4095

Processing Times Preset retentivity From MB 0 to MB 15

Processing times for Clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)

Bit operations Min. 0.2 s Data blocks Max. 511 (DB 0 reserved)

Word instructions Min. 0.2 s Size Max. 64 Kbytes

Integer math Min. 0.2 s Local data (can be set) Max. 8 Kbytes
instructions Preset 4 Kbytes
Floating-point math Min. 0.6 s Blocks
instructions
OBs See instruction list
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
Nesting depth
Per priority class 24
Additionally in an error 2
OB
FBs Max. 256
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
FCs Max. 256
Size Max. 64 Kbytes

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-64 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Address Areas (Inputs/Outputs) Time


Total I/O address area 4 Kbytes/4 Kbytes Clock Yes
Of which distributed Buffered Yes
MPI/DP interface 2 Kbytes/2 Kbytes Resolution 1 ms
DP interface 4 Kbytes/4 Kbytes Accuracy at
Process Image 4 Kbytes/4 Kbytes Power off Deviation per day 1.7 s
(can be set)
Power on Deviation per day 8.6 s
Preset 128 bytes/128 bytes
Runtime meter 8
Number of partial Max. 8
Number 0 to 7
process images
Consistent data Max. 244 bytes
Value Range 0 to 32767 hours

Digital channels 32768/32768


Granularity 1 hour

Of which central 32768/32768


Retentive Yes
Time synchronization Yes
Analog channels 2048/2048
Of which central 2048/2048
in the PLC Master/slave

Configuration
On MPI Master/slave
S7 Message Functions
Central racks/expansion Max. 1/21
units Number of stations that can Max. 8
log on for message
Multicomputing Max. 4 CPUs
functions (e.g. OS)
(with UR1 or UR2)
SCAN procedure Yes
Number of plug-in IMs Max. 6
(overall) Number of additional 1
values per message
IM 460 Max. 6
With 100 ms grid None
IM 463 Max. 6
With 500, 1000 ms 1
Number of DP masters
grid
Integrated 2
Number of messages
Via interface None Overall Max. 512
submodule
100 ms grid None
Via IM Max. 4
500 ms grid Max. 256
Via CP Max. 10 1000 ms grid Max. 256
IM 467 cannot be used with CP 443-5 Process diagnostic Yes
Number of plug-in S5 Max. 6 messages
modules via adapter casing Simultaneously active Max. 70
(in the central rack) ALARM-S blocks
Operable function modules Process control reports Yes
and communication
processors ALARM-8 blocks Yes

FM Limited by the number of Number of instances Max. 300


slots and the number of for ALARM-8 blocks
connections and blocks for S7
communication (can be
CP, point-to-point Limited by the number of set)
slots and the number of
connections Preset 150

CP, LAN Max. 14 Number of archive IDs that 4


can log on at the same time

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-65
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Test and Startup Functions Interfaces


Monitor/modify variable Yes 1st Interface
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory Type of interface Integrated interface
markers, DB, distributed submodule
inputs/outputs, timers,
Physical RS 485
counters
Isolated Yes
Number of variables Max. 70
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
Force Yes
(15 VDC to 30 VDC)
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory
Number of connection MPI: 16
markers, distributed
resources DP: 16
inputs/outputs
Functionality
Number Max. 64
Status block Yes
MPI Yes

Single sequence Yes


PROFIBUS DP DP master

Diagnostic buffer Yes


Point-to-point No
connection
Number of entries Max. 400 (can be set)
MPI
Preset 120
Utilities
Communication Functions
Programming Yes
Programming device/OP Yes device/OP
communication communication
Global data communication Yes Routing Yes
Number of GD Global data Yes
packages communication
Sender Max. 8 S7 basic Yes
communication
Recipient Max. 16
S7 communication Yes
Size of GD packages Max. 64 bytes
Of which consistent 32 bytes
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
DP master
S7 basic communication Yes
Utilities
User data per job Max. 76 bytes
Programming Yes
Of which consistent 16 bytes device/OP
S7 communication Yes communication

User data per job Max. 64 Kbytes


Routing Yes
Equidistance Yes
Of which consistent 32 bytes
SYNC/FREEZE Yes
S5-compatible Yes (via CP and loadable
communication FC) Enable/disable DP Yes
slaves
User data per job Max. 8 Kbytes
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Of which consistent 240 bytes
Number of DP slaves Max. 32
Standard communication Yes (via CP and loadable
FC) Address area Max. 2 Kbytes I /
2 Kbytes O
User data per job Depends on CP
User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I /
Of which consistent Depends on CP 244 bytes O
Number of connection 16
resources

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-66 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

DP Slave Programming
Utilities Programming language LAD, FBD, STL, SCL
Monitor/modify; Yes, if the interface is active Instruction set See instruction list
programming;
routing Bracket levels 8
DDB file http://www.ad.siemens.de/c System functions (SFC) See instruction list
si_e/gsd
Number of SFCs active at
Transmission rate Up to 12 Mbps the same time
Intermediate memory 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O WR_REC 8
Address areas Max. 32 with a max. of 32 WR_PARM 8
bytes each
PARM_MOD 1
2nd Interface
WR_DPARM 2
Type of interface Integrated interface
submodule DPNRM_DG 8

Physical RS 485 RDSYSST 1 to 8

Isolated Yes System function blocks See instruction list


(SFB)
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
(15 VDC to 30 VDC) Number of SFBs active at
the same time
Number of connection 16
resources RD_REC 8

Functionality WR_REC 8

MPI No User program protection Password protection

PROFIBUS DP DP master Dimensions

Point-to-point No Installation dimensions 25290219


connection WHD (mm)

DP Master Slots required 1

Utilities Weight Approx. 0.72 kg


Programming Yes Voltages, Currents
device/OP
Supply voltage Rated value 24 VDC
communication
Routing Yes Current consumption from Typ. 1.5 A
S7-400 bus (5 VDC) Max. 1.6 A
Equidistance Yes
SYNC/FREEZE Yes Current consumption from Max. 0.3 A
S7-400 bus (24 VDC)
Enable/disable Yes
DP slaves Backup current Typ. 40 A
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps Max. 320 A

Number of DP slaves Max. 64 Incoming supply of external 5 VDC to 15 VDC


backup voltage to the CPU
Address area Max. 4 Kbytes I /
4 Kbytes A Power loss Typ. 8 W

User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I /


244 bytes O
DP Slave
Technical specifications as for the 1st interface

CPU as DP Slave
You can only configure the CPU once as a DP slave even if the CPU has several
interfaces.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-67
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.16 Technical Specifications of the CPU 414-2;


(6ES7 414-2XG03-0AB0)

CPU and Version Timers/Counters and Their Retentivity


MLFB 6ES7 414-2XG03-0AB0 S7 counters 256
Hardware version 05 Retentivity can be set From Z 0 to Z 255
Firmware version V 3.0.0 Preset From Z 0 to Z 7
Associated programming As of STEP7 V 5.1; Counting range 1 to 999
package ServicePack 2
IEC counter Yes
Memory
Type SFB
Working memory
S7 timers 256
Integrated 128 Kbytes for program
Retentivity can be set From T 0 to T 255
128 Kbytes for data
Preset No retentive timers
Expandable No
Time range 10 ms to 9990 s
Load memory
IEC timers Yes
Integrated 256 Kbytes RAM
Expandable FEPROM With memory card (FLASH)
Type SFB
up to 64 Mbytes Data Areas and Their Retentivity
Expandable RAM With memory card (RAM) Total retentive data area Total working and load
up to 64 Mbytes (incl. memory markers, memory (with backup
timers, counters) battery)
Backup Yes
With battery All data Memory markers 8 Kbytes

Without battery None Retentivity can be set From MB 0 to MB 8191

Processing Times Preset retentivity From MB 0 to MB 15

Processing times for Clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)

Bit operations Min. 0.1 s Data blocks Max. 4095 (DB 0 reserved)

Word instructions Min. 0.1 s Size Max. 64 Kbytes

Integer math Min. 0.1 s Local data (can be set) Max. 16 Kbytes
instructions Preset 8 Kbytes
Floating-point math Min. 0.6 s
instructions

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-68 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Blocks Number of plug-in S5 Max. 6


modules via adapter casing
OBs See instruction list
(in the central rack)
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
Operable function modules
Nesting depth and communication
processors
Per priority class 24
Additionally in an error 2
FM Limited by the number of
slots and the number of
OB
connections
FBs Max. 2048
CP, point-to-point Limited by the number of
Size Max. 64 Kbytes slots and the number of
connections
FCs Max. 2048
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
CP, LAN Max. 14
Time
Address Areas (Inputs/Outputs)
Clock Yes
Total I/O address area 8 Kbytes/8 Kbytes
Of which distributed
Buffered Yes

MPI/DP interface 2 Kbytes/2 Kbytes


Resolution 1 ms

DP interface 6 Kbytes/6 Kbytes


Accuracy at
Power off Deviation per day 1.7 s
Process Image 8 Kbytes/8 Kbytes
(can be set) Power on Deviation per day 8.6 s
Preset 256 bytes/256 bytes Runtime meter 8
Number of partial Max. 8 Number 0 to 7
process images
Value Range 0 to 32767 hours
Consistent data Max. 244 bytes
Granularity 1 hour
Digital channels 65536/65536
Retentive Yes
Of which central 65536/65536
Time synchronization Yes
Analog channels 4096/4096
In the PLC Master/slave
Of which central 4096/4096
On MPI Master/slave
Configuration
S7 Message Functions
Central racks/expansion Max. 1/21
Number of stations that can Max. 8
units
log on for message
Multicomputing Max. 4 CPUs functions (e.g. OS)
(with UR1 or UR2)
SCAN procedure Yes
Number of plug-in IMs Max. 6
(overall)
Number of additional
values per message
IM 460 Max. 6
With 100 ms grid Max. 1
IM 463 Max. 6
With 500, 1000 ms Max. 10
Number of DP masters grid
Integrated 2 Number of messages
Via interface None Overall Max. 512
submodule 100 ms grid Max. 128
Via IM Max. 4 500 ms grid Max. 256
Via CP Max. 10 1000 ms grid Max. 512

IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-69
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Process diagnostic Yes S5-compatible Yes (via CP and loadable


messages communication FC)
Simultaneously active Max. 100 User data per job Max. 8 Kbytes
ALARM-S blocks
Of which consistent 240 bytes
Process control reports Yes
Standard communication Yes (via CP and loadable
ALARM-8 blocks Yes FC)
Number of instances Max. 600 User data per job Depends on CP
for ALARM-8 blocks
Of which consistent Depends on CP
and blocks for S7
communication (can be Number of connection 32
set) resources
Preset 300 Interfaces
Number of archive IDs that 16 1st Interface
can log on at the same time
Type of interface Integrated interface
Test and Startup Functions submodule
Status/modify variable Yes Physical RS 485
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory Isolated Yes
markers, DB, distributed
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
inputs/outputs, timers,
(15 VDC to 30 VDC)
counters
Number of connection MPI: 32
Number of variables Max. 70
resources DP: 16
Force Yes
Functionality
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory
MPI Yes
markers, distributed
inputs/outputs PROFIBUS DP DP master
Number of variables Max. 256 Point-to-point No
connection
Status block Yes
MPI
Single sequence Yes
Diagnostic buffer Yes
Utilities
Programming Yes
Number of entries Max. 400 (can be set)
device/OP
Preset 120 communication
Communication Functions Routing Yes
Programming device/OP Yes Global data Yes
communication communication
Global data communication Yes S7 basic Yes
communication
Number of GD
packages S7 communication Yes
Sender Max. 8 Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Recipient Max. 16 DP Master
Size of GD packages Max. 64 bytes Utilities
Of which consistent 32 bytes Programming Yes
device/OP
S7 basic communication Yes
communication
User data per job Max. 76 bytes
Routing Yes
Of which consistent 16 bytes
Equidistance Yes
S7 communication Yes
SYNC/FREEZE Yes
User data per job Max. 64 Kbytes
Enable/disable DP Yes
Of which consistent 32 bytes slaves
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-70 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Number of DP slaves Max. 32 Programming


Address area Max. 2 Kbytes I / Programming language LAD, FBD, STL, SCL
2 Kbytes O
Instruction set See instruction list
User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I /
Bracket levels 8
244 bytes O
System functions (SFCs) See instruction list
DP Slave
Utilities System function blocks See instruction list
(SFBs)
Monitor/modify; Yes, if the interface is active
programming; Number of SFCs active at
routing the same time
DDB file http://www.ad.siemens.de/c WR_REC 8
si_e/gsd
WR_PARM 8
Transmission rate Up to 12 Mbps
PARM_MOD 1
Intermediate memory 244 bytes I/244 bytes O
WR_DPARM 2
Address areas Max. 32 with a max. of 32
bytes each
DPNRM_DG 8

2nd Interface RDSYSST 1 to 8

Type of interface Integrated interface System function blocks See instruction list
submodule (SFBs)

Physical RS 485 Number of SFBs active at


the same time
Isolated Yes
RD_REC 8
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
(15 VDC to 30 VDC) WR_REC 8

Ne of connection resources 16 User program protection Password protection

Functionality Dimensions

MPI No Installation dimensions 25290219


WHD (mm)
PROFIBUS DP DP master
Slots required 1
Point-to-point No
connection Weight Approx. 0.72 kg

DP Master Voltages, Currents

Utilities Supply voltage Rated value 24 VDC


Programming Yes Current consumption from Typ. 1.5 A
device/OP S7-400 bus (5 VDC) Max. 1.6 A
communication
Current consumption from Max. 0.3 A
Routing Yes S7-400 bus (24 VDC)
Equidistance Yes
Backup current Typ. 40 A
SYNC/FREEZE Yes
Max. 380 A
Enable/disable DP Yes
slaves Incoming supply of external 5 VDC to 15 VDC
backup voltage to the CPU
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Power loss Typ. 8 W
Number of DP slaves Max. 96
Address area Max. 6 Kbytes I/6 Kbytes O
User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes
I/244 bytes O
DP Slave
As for the 1st interface

CPU as DP Slave
You can only configure the CPU once as a DP slave even if the CPU has several
interfaces.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-71
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.17 Technical Specifications of the CPU 414-3;


(6ES7 414-3XJ00-0AB0)

CPU and Version Timers/Counters and Their Retentivity


MLFB 6ES7 414-3XJ00-0AB0 S7 counters 256
Hardware version 04 Retentivity can be set From Z 0 to Z 255
Firmware version V 3.0.0 Preset From Z 0 to Z 7
Associated programming As of STEP7 V 5.1; Counting range 1 to 999
package ServicePack 2
IEC counter Yes
Memory
Type SFB
Working memory
S7 timers 256
Integrated 384 Kbytes for program
Retentivity can be set From T 0 to T 255
384 Kbytes for data
Preset No retentive timers
Expandable No
Time range 10 ms to 9990 s
Load memory
IEC timers Yes
Integrated 256 Kbytes RAM
Expandable FEPROM With memory card (FLASH)
Type SFB
up to 64 Mbytes Data Areas and Their Retentivity
Expandable RAM With memory card (RAM) Total retentive data area Total working and load
up to 64 Mbytes (incl. memory markers, memory (with backup
timers, counters) battery)
Backup Yes
With battery All data Memory markers 8 Kbytes

Without battery None Retentivity can be set From MB 0 to MB 8191

Processing Times Preset retentivity From MB 0 to MB 15

Processing times for Clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)

Bit operations Min. 0.1 s Data blocks Max. 4095 (DB 0 reserved)

Word instructions Min. 0.1 s Size Max. 64 Kbytes

Integer math Min. 0.1 s Local data (can be set) Max. 16 Kbytes
instructions Preset 8 Kbytes
Floating-point math Min. 0.6 s
instructions

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-72 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Blocks Number of plug-in S5 Max. 6


modules via adapter casing
OBs See instruction list
(in the central rack)
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
Operable function modules
Nesting depth and communication
processors
Per priority class 24
Additionally in an error 2
FM Limited by the number of
slots and the number of
OB
connections
FBs Max. 2048
CP, point-to-point Limited by the number of
Size Max. 64 Kbytes slots and the number of
connections
FCs Max. 2048
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
CP, LAN Max. 14
Time
Address Areas (Inputs/Outputs)
Clock Yes
Total I/O address area 8 Kbytes/8 Kbytes
Of which distributed
Buffered Yes

MPI/DP interface 2 Kbytes/2 Kbytes


Resolution 1 ms

DP interface 6 Kbytes/6 Kbytes


Accuracy at
Power off Deviation per day 1.7 s
Process Image 8 Kbytes/8 Kbytes
(can be set) Power on Deviation per day 8.6 s
Preset 256 bytes/256 bytes Runtime meter 8
Number of partial Max. 8 Number 0 to 7
process images
Value Range 0 to 32767 hours
Consistent data Max. 244 bytes
Granularity 1 hour
Digital channels 65536/65536
Retentive Yes
Of which central 65536/65536
Time synchronization Yes
Analog channels 4096/4096
In the PLC Master/slave
Of which central 4096/4096
On MPI Master/slave
Configuration
S7 Message Functions
Central racks/expansion Max. 1/21
Number of stations that can Max. 8
units
log on for message
Multicomputing Max. 4 CPUs functions (e.g. OS)
(with UR1 or UR2)
SCAN procedure Yes
Number of plug-in IMs Max. 6
(overall)
Number of additional
values per message
IM 460 Max. 6
With 100 ms grid Max. 1
IM 463 Max. 6
With 500, 1000 ms Max. 10
Number of DP masters grid
Integrated 2 Number of messages
Via interface 1 Overall Max. 512
submodule 100 ms grid Max. 128
Via IM Max. 4 500 ms grid Max. 256
Via CP Max. 10 1000 ms grid Max. 512

IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5 Process diagnostic Yes


messages
Simultaneously active Max. 100
ALARM-S blocks
Process control reports Yes

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-73
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

ALARM-8 blocks Yes User data per job Depends on CP


Number of instances Max. 600 Of which consistent Depends on CP
for ALARM-8 blocks
Number of connection 32
and blocks for
resources
S7 communication (can
be set) Interfaces
Preset 300 1st Interface
Number of archive IDs that 16 Type of interface Integrated interface
can log on at the same time submodule
Test and Startup Functions Physical RS 485
Monitor/modify variable Yes Isolated Yes
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
markers, DB, distributed (15 VDC to 30 VDC)
inputs/outputs, timers,
Number of connection MPI: 32
counters
resources DP: 16
Number of variables Max. 70
Functionality
Force Yes
MPI Yes
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory
PROFIBUS DP DP master
markers, distributed
inputs/outputs Point-to-point No
connection
Number of variables Max. 256
MPI
Status block Yes
Single sequence Yes
Utilities
Programming Yes
Diagnostic buffer Yes
device/OP
Number of entries Max. 3200 (can be set) communication
Preset 120 Routing Yes
Communication Functions Global data Yes
communication
Programming device/OP Yes
communication S7 basic Yes
communication
Global data communication Yes
S7 communication Yes
Number of GD
packages Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Sender Max. 8 DP Master
Recipient Max. 16 Utilities
Size of GD packages Max. 64 bytes Programming Yes
device/OP
Of which consistent 32 bytes
communication
S7 basic communication Yes
Routing Yes
User data per job Max. 76 bytes
Equidistance Yes
Of which consistent 16 Byte
SYNC/FREEZE Yes
S7 communication Yes
Enable/disable DP Yes
User data per job Max. 64 Kbytes slaves
Of which consistent 32 bytes Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
S5-compatible Yes (via CP and loadable Number of DP slaves Max. 32
communication FC)
Address area Max. 2 Kbytes I/2 Kbytes O
User data per job Max. 8 Kbytes
User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes
Of which consistent 240 bytes I/244 bytes O
Standard communication Yes (via CP and loadable
FC)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-74 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

DP Slave 3rd Interface


Utilities Type of interface Plug-in interface submodule
Monitor/modify; Yes, if the interface is active Insertable interface IF-964-DP
programming; submodule
routing
Technical features as for the 2nd interface
DDB file http://www.ad.siemens.de/c
si_e/gsd Programming
Transmission rate Up to 12 Mbps Programming language LAD, FBD, STL, SCL
Intermediate memory 244 bytes I/244 bytes O Instruction set See instruction list
Address areas Max. 32 with a max. of 32 Bracket levels 8
bytes each
System functions (SFC) See instruction list
2nd Interface
Number of SFCs active at
Type of interface Integrated interface the same time
submodule
WR_REC 8
Physical RS 485
WR_PARM 8
Isolated Yes
PARM_MOD 1
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
(15 VDC to 30 VDC) WR_DPARM 2

Number of connection 16 DPNRM_DG 8


resources RDSYSST 1 to 8
Functionality System function blocks See instruction list
MPI No (SFB)

PROFIBUS DP DP master Number of SFBs active at


the same time
Point-to-point No
connection RD_REC 8

DP Master WR_REC 8

Utilities User program protection Password protection


Programming Yes Dimensions
device/OP
Installation dimensions 50290219
communication
WHD (mm)
Routing Yes
Slots required 2
Equidistance Yes
Weight Approx. 1.07 kg
SYNC/FREEZE Yes
Voltages, Currents
Enable/disable DP Yes
slaves Supply voltage Rated value 24 VDC
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps Current consumption from Typ. 1.5 A
Number of DP slaves Max. 96
S7-400 bus (5 VDC) Max. 1.6 A
Address area Max. 6 Kbytes I/6 Kbytes O Current consumption from Max. 0.45 A
S7-400 bus (24 VDC)
User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes
I/244 bytes O Backup current Typ. 40 A
DP Slave Max. 420 A

As for the 1st interface Incoming supply of external 5 VDC to 15 VDC


backup voltage to the CPU
Power loss Typ. 8 W

CPU as DP Slave
You can only configure the CPU once as a DP slave even if the CPU has several
interfaces.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-75
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.18 Technical Specifications of the CPU 414-4H;


(6ES7 414-4HJ00-0AB0)

CPU and Version Timers/Counters and Their Retentivity


MLFB 6ES7 414-4HJ00-0AB0 S7 counters 256
Hardware version 01 Retentivity can be set From Z 0 to Z 255
Firmware version V 3.0.0 Preset From Z 0 to Z 7
Associated programming As of STEP7 V 5.1; Counting range 1 to 999
package ServicePack 1
IEC counter Yes
Add-on package
S7-H systems Type SFB
Memory S7 timers 256
Working memory Retentivity can be set From T 0 to T 255
Integrated 384 Kbytes for program Preset No retentive timers
384 Kbytes for data Time range 10 ms to 9990 s
Expandable No IEC timers Yes
Load memory Type SFB
Integrated 256 Kbytes RAM Data Areas and Their Retentivity
Expandable FEPROM With memory card (FLASH) Total retentive data area Total working and load
up to 64 Mbytes (incl. memory markers, memory (with backup
Expandable RAM With memory card (RAM) timers, counters) battery)
up to 64 Mbytes Memory markers 8 Kbytes
Backup Yes Retentivity can be set From MB 0 to MB 8191
With battery All data Preset retentivity From MB 0 to MB 15
Without battery None Clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)
Processing Times Data blocks Max. 4095 (DB 0 reserved)
Processing times for Size Max. 64 Kbytes
Bit operations Min. 0.1 s Local data (can be set) Max. 16 Kbytes
Word instructions Min. 0.1 s Preset 8 Kbytes
Integer math Min. 0.1 s
instructions
Floating-point math Min. 0.6 s
instructions

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-76 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Blocks Number of plug-in S5 None


modules via adapter casing
OBs See instruction list
(in the central rack)
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
Operable function modules
Nesting depth and communication
processors
Per priority class 24
Additionally in an error 2
FM Limited by the number of
slots and the number of
OB
connections
FBs Max. 2048
CP, point-to-point Limited by the number of
Size Max. 64 Kbytes slots and the number of
connections
FCs Max. 2048
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
CP, LAN Max. 14
Time
Address Areas (Inputs/Outputs)
Clock Yes
Total I/O address area 8 Kbytes/8 Kbytes
Of which distributed
Buffered Yes

MPI/DP interface 2 Kbytes/2 Kbytes


Resolution 1 ms

DP interface 6 Kbytes/6 Kbytes


Accuracy at
Power off Deviation per day 1.7 s
Process Image 8 Kbytes/8 Kbytes
(can be set) Power on Deviation per day 8.6 s
Preset 256 bytes/256 bytes Runtime meter 8
Number of partial Max. 8 Number 0 to 7
process images
Value Range 0 to 32767 hours
Consistent data Max. 244 bytes
Granularity 1 hour
Digital channels 65536/65536
Retentive Yes
Of which central 65536/65536
Time synchronization Yes
Analog channels 4096/4096
In the PLC Master/slave
Of which central 4096/4096
On MPI Master/slave
Configuration
S7 Message Functions
Central racks/expansion Max. 1/21
Number of stations that can Max. 8
units
log on for message
Multicomputing No functions (e.g. OS)
Number of plug-in IMs Max. 6 SCAN procedure No
(overall)
Number of additional
IM 460 Max. 6 values per message
IM 463 Max. 6 With 100 ms grid Max. 1
Number of DP masters With 500, 1000 ms Max. 10
grid
Integrated 2
Via interface None
Number of messages
submodule Overall Max. 512

Via IM Max. 4 100 ms grid Max. 128


500 ms grid Max. 256
Via IM/CP Max. 10
1000 ms grid Max. 512
IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-77
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Process diagnostic Yes Interfaces


messages
1st Interface
Simultaneously active Max. 100
Type of interface Integrated interface
ALARM-S blocks
submodule
Process control reports Yes
Physical RS 485
ALARM-8 blocks Yes
Isolated Yes
Number of instances Max. 600
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
for ALARM-8 blocks
(15 VDC to 30 VDC)
and blocks for
S7 communication (can Number of connection MPI: 32
be set) resources DP: 16
Preset 300 Functionality
Number of archive IDs that 16 MPI Yes
can log on at the same time
PROFIBUS DP DP master
Test and Startup Functions
Point-to-point No
Monitor/modify variable Yes connection
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory MPI
markers, DB, distributed
inputs/outputs, timers,
Utilities
counters Programming Yes
device/OP
Number of variables Max. 70
communication
Force Yes
Routing Yes
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory
Global data No
markers, distributed
communication
inputs/outputs
S7 basic No
Number of variables Max. 256
communication
Status block Yes
S7 communication Yes
Single sequence Yes
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Diagnostic buffer Yes
DP Master
Number of entries Max. 3200 (can be set)
Utilities
Preset 120
Programming Yes
Communication Functions device/OP
communication
Programming device/OP Yes
communication Routing Yes
Global data communication No Equidistance No
S7 basic communication No SYNC/FREEZE No
S7 communication Yes Enable/disable DP No
slaves
User data per job Max. 64 Kbytes
Of which consistent 32 bytes
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps

S5-compatible Yes (via CP and loadable


Number of DP slaves Max. 32
communication FC) Address area Max. 2 Kbytes I/2 Kbytes O
User data per job Max. 8 Kbytes User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes
I/244 bytes O
Of which consistent 32 bytes
Standard communication Yes (via CP and loadable
FC)
User data per job Depends on CP
Of which consistent Depends on CP
Number of connection 32
resources

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-78 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

2nd Interface Programming


Type of interface Integrated interface Programming language LAD, FBD, STL, SCL
submodule
Instruction set See instruction list
Physical RS 485
Bracket levels 8
Isolated Yes
System functions (SFC) See instruction list
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
Number of SFCs active at
(15 VDC to 30 VDC)
the same time
Number of connection 16
resources
WR_REC 8

Functionality
WR_PARM 8

MPI No
PARM_MOD 1

PROFIBUS DP DP master
WR_DPARM 2

Point-to-point No
DPNRM_DG 8
connection RDSYSST 1 to 8
DP Master System function blocks See instruction list
Utilities
(SFB)

Programming Yes Number of SFBs active at


device/OP the same time
communication RD_REC 8
Routing Yes
WR_REC 8
Equidistance No
User program protection Password protection
SYNC/FREEZE No
Dimensions
Enable/disable DP No
slaves Installation dimensions 50290219
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps WHD (mm)

Number of DP slaves Max. 96 Slots required 2

Address area Max. 6 Kbytes I/6 Kbytes O Weight Approx. 1.07 kg

User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytesI/ Voltages, Currents


244 bytes O Supply voltage Rated value 24 VDC
3rd Interface Current consumption from Typ. 1.6 A
Type of interface Plug-in interface submodule S7-400 bus (5 VDC) Max. 1.8 A
(fiber-optic cable)
Current consumption from Max. 0.3 A
Insertable interface Synchronization module S7-400 bus (24 VDC)
submodule IF 960 (only during
Backup current Typ. 40 A
redundancy mode; during
single mode the interface is Max. 420 A
free/covered) Incoming supply of external 5 VDC to 15 VDC
4th Interface backup voltage to the CPU

Type of interface Plug-in interface submodule Power loss Typ. 8 W


(fiber-optic cable)
Insertable interface Synchronization module
submodule IF 960 (only during
redundancy mode; during
single mode the interface is
free/covered)

CPU as DP Slave
You must not configure the CPU as a DP slave.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-79
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.19 Technical Specifications of the CPU 416-2;


(6ES7 416-2XK02-0AB0)

CPU and Version Timers/Counters and Their Retentivity


MLFB 6ES7 416-2XK02-0AB0 S7 counters 512
Hardware version 05 Retentivity can be set From Z 0 to Z 511
Firmware version V 3.0.0 Preset From Z 0 to Z 7
Associated programming As of STEP7 V 5.1; Counting range 1 to 999
package ServicePack 2
IEC counter Yes
Memory
Type SFB
Working memory
S7 timers 512
Integrated 0.8 Mbytes for program
Retentivity can be set From T 0 to T 511
0.8 Mbytes for data
Preset No retentive timers
Expandable No
Time range 10 ms to 9990 s
Load memory
IEC timers Yes
Integrated 256 Kbytes RAM
Expandable FEPROM With memory card (FLASH)
Type SFB
up to 64 Mbytes Data Areas and Their Retentivity
Expandable RAM With memory card (RAM) Total retentive data area Total working and load
up to 64 Mbytes (incl. memory markers, memory (with backup
timers, counters) battery)
Backup Yes
With battery All data Memory markers 16 Kbytes

Without battery None Retentivity can be set From MB 0 to MB 16383

Processing Times Preset retentivity From MB 0 to MB 15

Processing times for Clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)

Bit operations Min. 0.08 s Data blocks Max. 4095 (DB 0 reserved)

Word instructions Min. 0.08 s Size Max. 64 Kbytes

Integer math Min. 0.08 s Local data (can be set) Max. 32 Kbytes
instructions Preset 16 Kbytes
Floating-point math Min. 0.48 s
instructions

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-80 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Blocks Number of plug-in S5 Max. 6


modules via adapter casing
OBs See instruction list
(in the central rack)
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
Operable function modules
Nesting depth and communication
processors
Per priority class 24
Additionally in an error 2
FM Limited by the number of
slots and the number of
OB
connections
FBs Max. 2048
CP, point-to-point Limited by the number of
Size Max. 64 Kbytes slots and the number of
connections
FCs Max. 2048
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
CP, LAN Max. 14
Time
Address Areas (Inputs/Outputs)
Clock Yes
Total I/O address area 16 Kbytes/16 Kbytes
Of which distributed
Buffered Yes

MPI/DP interface 2 Kbytes/2 Kbytes


Resolution 1 ms

DP interface 8 Kbytes/8 Kbytes


Accuracy at
Power off Deviation per day 1.7 s
Process Image 16 Kbytes/16 Kbytes
(can be set) Power on Deviation per day 8.6 s
Preset 512 bytes/512 bytes Runtime meter 8
Number of partial Max. 8 Number 0 to 7
process images
Value Range 0 to 32767 hours
Consistent data Max. 244 bytes
Granularity 1 hour
Digital channels 131072/131072
Retentive Yes
Of which central 131072/131072
Time synchronization Yes
Analog channels 8192/8192
In the PLC Master/slave
Of which central 8192/8192
On MPI Master/slave
Configuration
S7 Message Functions
Central racks/expansion Max. 1/21
Number of stations that can Max. 12
units
log on for message
Multicomputing Max. 4 CPUs functions (e.g. OS)
(with UR1 or UR2)
SCAN procedure Yes
Number of plug-in IMs Max. 6
(overall)
Number of additional
values per message
IM 460 Max. 6
With 100 ms grid Max. 1
IM 463 Max. 6
With 500, 1000 ms Max. 10
Number of DP masters grid
Integrated 2 Number of messages
Via interface None Overall Max. 1024
submodule 100 ms grid Max. 128
Via IM Max. 4 500 ms grid Max. 512
Via CP Max. 10 1000 ms grid Max. 1024

IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5 Process diagnostic Yes


messages
Simultaneously active Max. 200
ALARM-S blocks
Process control reports Yes

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-81
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

ALARM-8 blocks Yes User data per job Depends on CP


Number of instances Max. 1800 Of which consistent Depends on CP
for ALARM-8 blocks
Number of connection 64
and blocks for S7
resources
communication (can be
set) Interfaces
Preset 600 1st Interface
Number of archive IDs that 32 Type of interface Integrated interface
can log on at the same time submodule
Test and Startup Functions Physical RS 485
Monitor/modify variable Yes Isolated Yes
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
markers, DB, distributed (15 VDC to 30 VDC)
inputs/outputs, timers,
Number of connection MPI: 44
counters
resources DP: 32
Number of variables Max. 70
Functionality
Force Yes
MPI Yes
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory
PROFIBUS DP DP master
markers, distributed
inputs/outputs Point-to-point No
connection
Number of variables Max. 512
MPI
Status block Yes
Single sequence Yes
Utilities
Programming Yes
Diagnostic buffer Yes
device/OP
Number of entries Max. 3200 (can be set) communication
Preset 120 Routing Yes
Communication Functions Global data Yes
communication
Programming device/OP Yes
communication S7 basic Yes
communication
Global data communication Yes
S7 communication Yes
Number of GD
packages Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Sender Max. 16 DP Master
Recipient Max. 32 Utilities
Size of GD packages Max. 64 bytes Programming Yes
device/OP
Of which consistent 32 bytes
communication
S7 basic communication Yes
Routing Yes
User data per job Max. 76 bytes
Equidistance Yes
Of which consistent 16 bytes
SYNC/FREEZE Yes
S7 communication Yes
Enable/disable DP Yes
User data per job Max. 64 Kbytes slaves
Of which consistent 32 bytes Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
S5-compatible Yes (via CP and loadable Number of DP slaves Max. 32
communication FC)
Address area Max. 2 Kbytes I /
User data per job Max. 8 Kbytes 2 Kbytes O
Of which consistent 240 bytes User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I /
244 bytes O
Standard communication Yes (via CP and loadable
FC)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-82 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

DP Slave Programming
Utilities Programming language LAD, FBD, STL, SCL
Monitor/modify; Yes, if the interface is active Instruction set See instruction list
programming;
routing Bracket levels 8
DDB file http://www.ad.siemens.de/c System functions (SFC) See instruction list
si_e/gsd
Number of SFCs active at
Transmission rate Up to 12 Mbps the same time
Intermediate memory 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O WR_REC 8
Address areas Max. 32 with a max. of 32 WR_PARM 8
bytes each
PARM_MOD 1
2nd Interface
WR_DPARM 2
Type of interface Integrated interface
submodule DPNRM_DG 8

Physical RS 485 RDSYSST 1 to 8

Isolated Yes System function blocks See instruction list


(SFB)
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
(15 VDC to 30 VDC) Number of SFBs active at
the same time
Number of connection 32
resources RD_REC 8

Functionality WR_REC 8

MPI No User program protection Password protection

PROFIBUS DP DP master
Dimensions

Point-to-point No
Installation dimensions
WHD (mm)
25290219
connection
Slots required 1
DP Master
Utilities Weight Approx. 0.72 kg
Programming Yes Voltages, Currents
device/OP Supply voltage Rated value 24 VDC
communication
Current consumption from Typ. 1.5 A
Routing Yes
S7-400 bus (5 VDC) Max. 1.6 A
Equidistance Yes
SYNC/FREEZE Yes Current consumption from Max. 0.3 A
S7-400 bus (24 VDC)
Enable/disable DP Yes
slaves Backup current Typ. 40 A
Max. 420 A
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Number of DP slaves Max. 125
Incoming supply of external
backup voltage to the CPU
5 VDC to 15 VDC

Address area Max. 8 Kbytes I / 8 Kbytes


Power loss Typ. 8 W
O
User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I /
244 bytes O
DP Slave
As for the 1st interface

CPU as DP Slave
You can only configure the CPU once as a DP slave even if the CPU has several
interfaces.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-83
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.20 Technical Specifications of the CPU 416-3;


(6ES7 416-3XL00-0AB0)

CPU and Version Timers/Counters and Their Retentivity


MLFB 6ES7 416-3XL00-0AB0 S7 counters 512
Hardware version 04 Retentivity can be set From Z 0 to Z 511
Firmware version V 3.0.0 Preset From Z 0 to Z 7
Associated programming As of STEP7 V 5.1; Counting range 1 to 999
package ServicePack 2
IEC counter Yes
Memory
Type SFB
Working memory
S7 timers 512
Integrated 1.6 Mbytes for program
Retentivity can be set From T 0 to T 511
1.6 Mbytes for data
Preset No retentive timers
Expandable No
Time range 10 ms to 9990 s
Load memory
IEC timers Yes
Integrated 256 Kbytes RAM
Expandable FEPROM With memory card (FLASH)
Type SFB
up to 64 Mbytes Data Areas and Their Retentivity
Expandable RAM With memory card (RAM) Total retentive data area Total working and load
up to 64 Mbytes (incl. memory markers, memory (with backup
timers, counters) battery)
Backup Yes
With battery All data Memory markers 16 Kbytes

Without battery None Retentivity can be set From MB 0 to MB 16383

Processing Times Preset retentivity From MB 0 to MB 15

Processing times for Clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)

Bit operations Min. 0.08 s Data blocks Max. 4095 (DB 0 reserved)

Word instructions Min. 0.08 s Size Max. 64 Kbytes

Integer math Min. 0.08 s Local data (can be set) Max. 32 Kbytes
instructions Preset 16 Kbytes
Floating-point math Min. 0.48 s
instructions

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-84 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Blocks Number of plug-in S5 Max. 6


modules via adapter casing
OBs See instruction list
(in the central rack)
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
Operable function modules
Nesting depth and communication
processors
Per priority class 24
Additionally in an error 2
FM Limited by the number of
slots and the number of
OB
connections
FBs Max. 2048
CP, point-to-point Limited by the number of
Size Max. 64 Kbytes slots and the number of
connections
FCs Max. 2048
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
CP, LAN Max. 14
Time
Address Areas (Inputs/Outputs)
Clock Yes
Total I/O address area 16 Kbytes/16 Kbytes
Of which distributed
Buffered Yes

MPI/DP interface 2 Kbytes/2 Kbytes


Resolution 1 ms

DP interface 8 Kbytes/8 Kbytes


Accuracy at
Power off Deviation per day 1.7 s
Process Image 16 Kbytes/16 Kbytes
(can be set) Power on Deviation per day 8.6 s
Preset 512 bytes/512 bytes Runtime meter 8
Number of partial Max. 8 Number 0 to 7
process images
Value Range 0 to 32767 hours
Consistent data Max. 244 bytes
Granularity 1 hour
Digital channels 131072/131072
Retentive Yes
Of which central 131072/131072
Time synchronization Yes
Analog channels 8192/8192
In the PLC Yes
Of which central 8192/8192
On MPI Yes
Configuration
S7 Message Functions
Central racks/expansion Max. 1/21
Number of stations that can Max. 12
units
log on for message
Multicomputing Max. 4 CPUs functions (e.g. OS)
(with UR1 or UR2)
SCAN procedure Yes
Number of plug-in IMs Max. 6
(overall)
Number of additional
values per message
IM 460 Max. 6
With 100 ms grid Max. 1
IM 463 Max. 6
With 500, 1000 ms Max. 10
Number of DP masters grid
Integrated 2 Number of messages
Via interface 1 Overall Max. 1024
submodule 100 ms grid Max. 128
Via IM Max. 4 500 ms grid Max. 512
Via CP Max. 10 1000 ms grid Max. 1024

IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5 Process diagnostic Yes


messages
Simultaneously active Max. 200
ALARM-S blocks
Process control reports Yes

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-85
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

ALARM-8 blocks Yes User data per job Depends on CP


Number of instances Max. 1800 Of which consistent Depends on CP
for ALARM-8 blocks
Number of connection 64
and blocks for S7
resources
communication (can be
set) Interfaces
Preset 600 1st Interface
Number of archive IDs that 32 Type of interface Integrated interface
can log on at the same time submodule
Test and Startup Functions Physical RS 485
Monitor/modify variable Yes Isolated Yes
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
markers, DB, distributed (15 VDC to 30 VDC)
inputs/outputs, timers,
Number of connection MPI: 44
counters
resources DP: 32
Number of variables Max. 70
Functionality
Force Yes
MPI Yes
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory
PROFIBUS DP DP master
markers, distributed
inputs/outputs Point-to-point No
connection
Number of variables Max. 512
MPI
Status block Yes
Single sequence Yes
Utilities
Programming Yes
Diagnostic buffer Yes
device/OP
Number of entries Max. 3200 (can be set) communication
Preset 120 Routing Yes
Communication Functions Global data Yes
communication
Programming device/OP Yes
communication S7 basic Yes
communication
Global data communication Yes
S7 communication Yes
Number of GD
packages Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Sender Max. 16 DP Master
Recipient Max. 32 Utilities
Size of GD packages Max. 64 bytes Programming Yes
device/OP
Of which consistent 32 bytes
communication
S7 basic communication Yes
Routing Yes
User data per job Max. 76 bytes
Equidistance Yes
Of which consistent 16 bytes
SYNC/FREEZE Yes
S7 communication Yes
Enable/disable DP Yes
User data per job Max. 64 Kbytes slaves
Of which consistent 32 bytes Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
S5-compatible Yes (via CP and loadable No. of those 1 for programming device,
communication FC) reserved 1 for OP
User data per job Max. 8 Kbytes Number of DP slaves Max. 32
Of which consistent 240 bytes Address area Max. 2 Kbytes I / 2 Kbytes
O
Standard communication Yes (via CP and loadable
FC)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-86 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I / 3rd Interface


244 bytes O
Type of interface Plug-in interface submodule
DP Slave
Insertable interface IF-964-DP
Utilities submodule
Monitor/modify; Yes, if the interface is active Technical features as for the 2nd interface
programming;
routing Programming
DDB file http://www.ad.siemens.de/c Programming language LAD, FBD, STL, SCL
si_e/gsd
Instruction set See instruction list
Transmission rate Up to 12 Mbps
Bracket levels 8
Intermediate memory 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O
System functions (SFC) See instruction list
Address areas Max. 32 with a max. of 32
Number of SFCs active at
bytes each
the same time
2nd Interface
WR_REC 8
Type of interface Integrated interface
submodule WR_PARM 8

Physical RS 485 PARM_MOD 1

Isolated Yes WR_DPARM 2

Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA DPNRM_DG 8


(15 VDC to 30 VDC) RDSYSST 1 to 8
Number of connection 32 System function blocks See instruction list
resources (SFB)
Functionality Number of SFBs active at
MPI No the same time

PROFIBUS DP DP master
RD_REC 8

Point-to-point No
WR_REC 8
connection User program protection Password protection
DP Master Dimensions
Utilities Installation dimensions 50290219
Programming Yes WHD (mm)
device/OP Slots required 2
communication
Weight Approx. 1.07 kg
Routing Yes
Equidistance Yes Voltages, Currents
SYNC/FREEZE Yes Supply voltage Rated value 24 VDC
Enable/disable DP Yes Current consumption from Typ. 1.6 A
slaves S7-400 bus (5 VDC) Max. 1.8 A
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps Current consumption from Max. 0.45 A
Number of DP slaves Max. 125 S7-400 bus (24 VDC)

Address area Max. 8 Kbytes I / 8 Kbytes Backup current Typ. 50 A


O Max. 460 A
User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I / Incoming supply of external 5 VDC to 15 VDC
244 bytes O backup voltage to the CPU
DP Slave Power loss Typ. 8 W
As for the 1st interface

CPU as DP Slave
You can only configure the CPU once as a DP slave even if the CPU has several
interfaces.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-87
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.21 Technical Specifications of the CPU 417-4;


(6ES7 417-4XL00-0AB0)

CPU and Version Type SFB


MLFB 6ES7 417-4XL00-0AB0 Data Areas and Their Retentivity
Hardware version 04 Total retentive data area Total working and load
Firmware version V 3.0.0 (incl. memory markers, memory (with backup
timers, counters) battery)
Associated programming As of STEP7 V 5.1;
package ServicePack 2 Memory markers 16 Kbytes
Memory Retentivity can be set From MB 0 to MB 16383
Working memory Preset retentivity From MB 0 to MB 15
Integrated 2 Mbytes for program Clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)
2 Mbytes for data Data blocks Max. 8191 (DB 0 reserved)
Expandable Up to 10 Mbytes for Size Max. 64 Kbytes
program
Local data (can be set) Max. 64 Kbytes
Up to 10 Mbytes for data
Preset 32 Kbytes
Load memory
Blocks
Integrated 256 Kbytes RAM
OBs See instruction list
Expandable FEPROM With memory card (FLASH)
up to 64 Mbytes Size Max. 64 Kbytes

Expandable RAM With memory card (RAM) Nesting depth


up to 64 Mbytes Per priority class 24
Backup Yes Additionally in an error 2
With battery All data OB

Without battery None FBs Max. 6144

Processing Times Size Max. 64 Kbytes

Processing times for FCs Max. 6144

Bit operations Min. 0.1 s Size Max. 64 Kbytes

Word instructions Min. 0.1 s Address Areas (Inputs/Outputs)

Integer math Min. 0.1 s Total I/O address area 16 Kbytes/16 Kbytes
instructions Of which distributed
Floating-point math Min. 0.6 s MPI/DP interface 2 Kbytes/2 Kbytes
instructions
DP interface 8 Kbytes/8 Kbytes
Timers/Counters and Their Retentivity
Process Image 16 Kbytes/16 Kbytes
S7 counters 512 (can be set)
Retentivity can be set From Z 0 to Z 511 Preset 1024 bytes/1024 bytes
Preset From Z 0 to Z 7 Number of partial Max. 8
Counting range 1 to 999 process images

IEC counter Yes Consistent data Max. 244 bytes

Type SFB Digital channels 131072/131072

S7 timers 512 Of which central 131072/131072

Retentivity can be set From T 0 to T 511 Analog channels 8192/8192

Preset No retentive timers Of which central 8192/8192

Time range 10 ms to 9990 s


IEC timers Yes

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-88 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Configuration S7 Message Functions


Central racks/expansion Max. 1/21 Number of stations that can Max. 16
units log on for message
functions (e.g. OS)
Multicomputing Max. 4 CPUs
(with UR1 or UR2) SCAN procedure Yes
Number of plug-in IMs Max. 6 Number of additional
(overall) values per message
IM 460 Max. 6 With 100 ms grid Max. 1
IM 463 Max. 6 With 500, 1000 ms Max. 10
grid
Number of DP masters
Integrated 2
Number of messages
Overall Max. 1024
Via interface 2
100 ms grid Max. 128
submodule
500 ms grid Max. 512
Via IM Max. 4
1000 ms grid Max. 1024
Via CP Max. 10
Process diagnostic Yes
IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5 messages
Number of plug-in S5 Max. 6 Simultaneously active Max. 200
modules via adapter casing ALARM-S blocks
(in the central rack)
Process control reports Yes
Operable function modules
and communication ALARM-8 blocks Yes
processors Number of instances Max. 10000
FM Limited by the number of for ALARM-8 blocks
slots and the number of and blocks for S7
connections communication (can be
set)
CP, point-to-point Limited by the number of
slots and the number of Preset 1200
connections Number of archive IDs that 64
CP, LAN Max. 14 can log on at the same time

Time Test and Startup Functions

Clock Yes Monitor/modify variable Yes

Buffered Yes Variables Inputs/outputs, memory


markers, DB, distributed
Resolution 1 ms inputs/outputs, timers,
Accuracy at counters

Power off Deviation per day 1.7 s Number of variables Max. 70

Power on Deviation per day 8.6 s Force Yes

Runtime meter 8 Variables Inputs/outputs, memory


markers, distributed
Number 0 to 7 inputs/outputs
Value Range 0 to 32767 hours Number of variables Max. 512
Granularity 1 hour Status block Yes
Retentive Yes Single sequence Yes
Time synchronization Yes Diagnostic buffer Yes
In the PLC Master/slave Number of entries Max. 3200 (can be set)
On MPI Master/slave Preset 120

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-89
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Communication Functions MPI


Programming device/OP Yes Utilities
communication
Programming Yes
Global data communication Yes device/OP
communication
Number of GD
packages Routing Yes
Sender Max. 16 Global data Yes
communication
Recipient Max. 32
S7 basic Yes
Size of GD packages Max. 64 bytes
communication
Of which consistent 32 bytes
S7 communication Yes
S7 basic communication Yes
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
User data per job Max. 76 bytes
DP Master
Of which consistent 16 bytes
Utilities
S7 communication Yes
Programming Yes
User data per job Max. 64 Kbytes device/OP
communication
Of which consistent 32 bytes
Routing Yes
S5-compatible Yes (via CP and loadable
communication FC) Equidistance Yes
User data per job Max. 8 Kbytes SYNC/FREEZE Yes
Of which consistent 240 bytes Enable/disable DP Yes
slaves
Standard communication Yes (via CP and loadable
FC) Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
User data per job Depends on CP Number of DP slaves Max. 32
Of which consistent Depends on CP Address area Max. 2 Kbytes I /
2 Kbytes O
Number of connection 64
resources User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I /
244 bytes O
Interfaces
DP Slave
1st Interface
Utilities
Type of interface Integrated interface
submodule Monitor/modify; Yes, if the interface is active
programming;
Physical RS 485 routing
Isolated Yes DDB file http://www.ad.siemens.de/c
si_e/gsd
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
(15 VDC to 30 VDC) Transmission rate Up to 12 Mbps
Number of connection MPI: 44 Intermediate memory 244 bytes I / 244 bytes O
resources DP: 32
Address areas Max. 32 with a max. of 32
Functionality bytes each
MPI Yes 2nd Interface

PROFIBUS DP DP master Type of interface Integrated interface


submodule
Point-to-point No
connection Physical RS 485
Isolated Yes
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
(15 VDC to 30 VDC)
Number of connection 32
resources

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-90 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Functionality Programming
MPI No Programming language LAD, FBD, STL, SCL
PROFIBUS DP DP master Instruction set See instruction list
Point-to-point No Bracket levels 8
connection System functions (SFC) See instruction list
DP Master Number of SFCs active at
Utilities the same time
Programming Yes WR_REC 8
device/OP
communication WR_PARM 8
Routing Yes PARM_MOD 1
Equidistance Yes WR_DPARM 2
SYNC/FREEZE Yes DPNRM_DG 8
Enable/disable Yes RDSYSST 1 to 8
DP slaves
System function blocks See instruction list
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps (SFB)
Number of DP slaves Max. 125 Number of SFBs active at
Address area Max. 8 Kbytes I / the same time
8 Kbytes O RD_REC 8
User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I / WR_REC 8
244 bytes O
User program protection Password protection
DP Slave
Dimensions
As for the 1st interface
Installation dimensions 50290219
3rd Interface
WHD (mm)
Type of interface Plug-in interface submodule
Slots required 2
Insertable interface IF-964-DP
Weight Approx. 1.07 kg
submodule
Voltages, Currents
Technical features as for the 2nd interface
Supply voltage Rated value 24 VDC
4th Interface
Current consumption from Typ. 1.8 A
Type of interface Plug-in interface submodule
S7-400 bus (5 VDC) Max. 2.0 A
Insertable interface IF-964-DP
submodule Current consumption from Max. 0.6 A
S7-400 bus (24 VDC)
Technical features as for the 2nd interface
Backup current Typ. 75 A
Max. 860 A
Incoming supply of external 5 VDC to 15 VDC
backup voltage to the CPU
Power loss Typ. 10 W

CPU as DP Slave
You can only configure the CPU once as a DP slave even if the CPU has several
interfaces.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-91
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

4.22 Technical Specifications of the CPU 417-4H;


(6ES7 417-4HL01-0AB0)

CPU and Version Timers/Counters and Their Retentivity


MLFB 6ES7 417-4HL01-0AB0 S7 counters 512
Hardware version 01 Retentivity can be set From Z 0 to Z 511
Firmware version V 3.0.0 Preset From Z 0 to Z 7
Associated programming As of STEP7 V 5.1; Counting range 1 to 999
package ServicePack 2
IEC counter Yes
Add-on package
S7 fault-tolerant systems Type SFB
Memory S7 timers 512
Working memory Retentivity can be set From T 0 to T 511
Integrated 2 Mbytes for program Preset No retentive timers
2 Mbytes for data Time range 10 ms to 9990 s
Expandable Up to 10 Mbytes for IEC timers Yes
program
Up to 10 Mbytes for data
Type SFB

Data Areas and Their Retentivity


Load memory
Total retentive data area Total working and load
Integrated 256 Kbytes RAM
(incl. memory markers, memory (with backup
Expandable FEPROM With memory card (FLASH) timers, counters) battery)
up to 64 Mbytes
Memory markers 16 Kbytes
Expandable RAM With memory card (RAM)
Retentivity can be set From MB 0 to MB 16383
up to 64 Mbytes
Backup Yes
Preset retentivity From MB 0 to MB 15
Clock memories 8 (1 memory byte)
With battery All data
Data blocks Max. 8191 (DB 0 reserved)
Without battery None
Processing Times
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
Local data (can be set) Max. 64 Kbytes
Processing times for
Bit operations Min. 0.1 s
Preset 32 Kbytes

Word instructions Min. 0.1 s


Integer math Min. 0.1 s
instructions
Floating-point math Min. 0.6 s
instructions

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-92 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Blocks Number of plug-in None


S5 modules via adapter
OBs See instruction list
casing (in the central rack)
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
Operable function modules
Nesting depth and communication
processors
Per priority class 24
Additionally in an error 2
FM Limited by the number of
slots and the number of
OB
connections
FBs Max. 6144
CP, point-to-point Limited by the number of
Size Max. 64 Kbytes slots and the number of
connections
FCs Max. 6144
Size Max. 64 Kbytes
CP, LAN Max. 14
Time
Address Areas (Inputs/Outputs)
Clock Yes
Total I/O address area 16 Kbytes/16 Kbytes
Of which distributed
Buffered Yes

MPI/DP interface 2 Kbytes/2 Kbytes


Resolution 1 ms

DP interface 8 Kbytes/8 Kbytes


Accuracy at
Power off Deviation per day 1.7 s
Process Image 16 Kbytes/16 Kbytes
(can be set) Power on Deviation per day 8.6 s
Preset 1024 bytes/1024 bytes Runtime meter 8
Number of partial Max. 8 Number 0 to 7
process images
Value Range 0 to 32767 hours
Consistent data Max. 244 bytes
Granularity 1 hour
Digital channels 131072/131072
Retentive Yes
Of which central 131072/131072
Time synchronization Yes
Analog channels 8192/8192
In the PLC Master/slave
Of which central 8192/8192
On MPI Master/slave
Configuration
S7 Message Functions
Central racks/expansion Max. 1/21
Number of stations that can Max. 16
units
log on for message
Multicomputing No functions (e.g. OS)
Number of plug-in IMs Max. 6 SCAN procedure No
(overall)
Number of additional
IM 460 Max. 6 values per message
IM 463 Max. 6 With 100 ms grid Max. 1
Number of DP masters With 500, 1000 ms Max. 10
grid
Integrated 2
Via interface None
Number of messages
submodule Overall Max. 1024

Via IM Max. 4 100 ms grid Max. 128


500 ms grid Max. 512
Via CP Max. 10
1000 ms grid Max. 1024
IM 467 cannot be used with the CP 443-5

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-93
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

Process diagnostic Yes Interfaces


messages
1st Interface
Simultaneously active Max. 200
Type of interface Integrated interface
ALARM-S blocks
submodule
Process control reports Yes
Physical RS 485
ALARM-8 blocks Yes
Isolated Yes
Number of instances Max. 10000
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
for ALARM-8 blocks
(15 VDC to 30 VDC)
and blocks for S7
communication (can be Number of connection MPI: 44
set) resources DP: 32
Preset 1200 Functionality
Number of archive IDs that 64 MPI Yes
can log on at the same time
PROFIBUS DP DP master
Test and Startup Functions
Point-to-point No
Monitor/modify variable Yes connection
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory MPI
markers, DB, distributed
inputs/outputs, timers,
Utilities
counters Programming Yes
device/OP
Number of variables Max. 70
communication
Force Yes
Routing Yes
Variables Inputs/outputs, memory
Global data No
markers, distributed
communication
inputs/outputs
S7 basic No
Number of variables Max. 512
communication
Status block Yes
S7 communication Yes
Single sequence Yes
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Diagnostic buffer Yes
DP Master
Number of entries Max. 3200 (can be set)
Utilities
Preset 120
Programming Yes
Communication Functions device/OP
communication
Programming device/OP Yes
communication Routing Yes
Global data communication No Equidistance No
S7 basic communication No SYNC/FREEZE No
S7 communication Yes Enable/disable DP No
slaves
User data per job Max. 64 Kbytes
Of which consistent 32 bytes
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps

S5-compatible Yes (via CP and loadable


Number of DP slaves Max. 32
communication FC) Address area Max. 2 Kbytes I /
2 Kbytes O
User data per job Max. 8 Kbytes
Of which consistent 32 bytes
User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I /
244 bytes O
Standard communication Yes (via CP and loadable
FC)
User data per job Depends on CP
Of which consistent Depends on CP
Number of connection 64
resources

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-94 A5E00069467-04
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

2nd Interface Programming


Type of interface Integrated interface Programming language LAD, FBD, STL, SCL
submodule
Instruction set See instruction list
Physical RS 485
Bracket levels 8
Isolated Yes
System functions (SFC) See instruction list
Power supply to interface Max. 150 mA
Number of SFCs active at
(15 VDC to 30 VDC)
the same time
Number of connection 32
resources
WR_REC 8

Functionality
WR_PARM 8
PARM_MOD 1
MPI No
WR_DPARM 2
PROFIBUS DP DP master
DPNRM_DG 8
Point-to-point No
connection RDSYSST 1 to 8
DP Master System function blocks See instruction list
(SFB)
Utilities
Programming Yes Number of SFBs active at
device/OP the same time
communication RD_REC 8
Routing Yes WR_REC 8
Equidistance No
User program protection Password protection
SYNC/FREEZE No
Dimensions
Enable/disable DP No
slaves Installation dimensions 50290219
WHD (mm)
Transmission rates Up to 12 Mbps
Slots required 2
Number of DP slaves Max. 125
Weight Approx. 1.07 kg
Address area Max. 8 Kbytes I /
8 Kbytes O Voltages, Currents

User data per DP slave Max. 244 bytes I / Supply voltage Rated value 24 VDC
244 bytes O Current consumption from Typ. 1.8 A
3rd Interface S7-400 bus (5 VDC) Max. 2.0 A
Type of interface Plug-in interface submodule Current consumption from Max. 0.6 A
(fiber-optic cable) S7-400 bus (24 VDC)
Insertable interface Synchronization module Backup current Typ. 75 A
submodule IF 960 (only during Max. 860 A
redundancy mode; during
single mode the interface is Incoming supply of external 5 VDC to 15 VDC
free/covered) backup voltage to the CPU
4th Interface Power loss Typ. 10 W
Type of interface Plug-in interface submodule
(fiber-optic cable)
Insertable interface Synchronization module
submodule IF 960 (only during
redundancy mode; during
single mode the interface is
free/covered)

CPU as DP Slave
You must not configure the CPU as DP slave.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 4-95
Central Processing Units for the S7-400

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


4-96 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules 5
Changes and Improvements Since the Previous Edition of the Reference Manual
Two new overview sections make it easier for you to access the information you
need:
The Module Overview section shows you the modules that are available,
together with their most important characteristics, and helps you quickly to find
the module suitable for your task.
The section entitled Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the
Module provides the answer to the question What must I do in succession to
commission the module quickly and successfully?

Structure of the Chapter


The present chapter is subdivided into the following subjects:
1. Overview containing the modules that are available here and a description
2. Information that is generally valid in other words, relating to all digital modules
(for example, parameter assignment and diagnostics)
3. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics,
diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special
characteristics of the module):
a) for digital input modules
b) for digital output modules

Additional Information Concerning the Following Topics Can be Found in


Chapter 8.
Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter records (data records 0, 1
and 128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this structure if you want to
modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.
Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0, 1) in the
system data. You must be familiar with this structure if you want to evaluate the
diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-1
Digital Modules

Chapter Overview

Section Description Page


5.1 Module Overview 5-3
5.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital 5-5
Module
5.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment 5-6
5.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules 5-9
5.5 Interrupts of the Digital Modules 5-13
5.6 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs 5-15
5.7 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 24 VDC; 5-17
(6ES7 421-1BL00-0AA0)
5.8 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32 24 VDC; 5-20
(6ES7 421-1BL01-0AA0)
5.9 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16 24 VDC; 5-23
(6ES7 421-7BH00-0AB0)
5.10 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16  120 VAC; 5-32
(6ES7 421-5EH00-0AA0)
5.11 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16  24/60 VUC; 5-35
(6ES7 421-7DH00-0AB0)
5.12 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC; 5-40
(6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)
5.13 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC; 5-43
(6ES7 421-1FH20-0AA0)
5.14 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32  120 VUC; 5-46
(6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0)
5.15 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A; 5-49
(6ES7 422-1BH10-0AA0)
5.16 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A; 5-52
(6ES7 422-1BH11-0AA0)
5.17 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16  20-125 VDC/1.5 A; 5-55
(6ES7 422-5EH10-0AB0)
5.18 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A; 5-60
(6ES7 422-1BL00-0AA0)
5.19 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A; 5-63
(6ES7 422-7BL00-0AB0)
5.20 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 8  120/230 VAC/5 A; 5-68
(6ES7 422-1FF00-0AA0)
5.21 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16  120/230 VAC/2 A; 5-72
(6ES7 422-1FH00-0AA0)
5.22 Digital Output Module SM 422; 5-76
DO 16  20-120 VAC/2 A; (6ES7 422-5EH00-0AB0)
5.23 Relay Output Module SM 422; 5-80
DO 16  30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A; (6ES7 422-1HH00-0AA0)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-2 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.1 Module Overview

Introduction
The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the digital
modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module
for your task.

Table 5-1 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421; SM 421;


Module
DI 3224 DI 1624 DI 16120 DI 1624/6 DI 16120 DI 16120/ DI 32120
VDC VDC VAC 0 VUC /230 VUC 230 VUC VUC
Characteristics (-1BL0x-) (-7BH00-) (-5EH00-) (-7DH00-) (-1FH00-) (-1FH20-) (-1EL00-)

Number of inputs 32 DI; 16 DI; 16 DI; 16 DI; 16 DI; 16 DI; 32 DI;


isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in
groups of groups of 8 groups of 1 groups of 1 groups of 4 groups of 4 groups of 8
32

Rated input 24 VDC 24 VDC 120 VAC 24 VUC to 120 VAC/ 120/230 120 VAC/
voltage 60 VUC 230 VDC VUC VDC
Suitable for... Switches
Two-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
Programmable No Yes No Yes No No No
diagnostics
Diagnostic No Yes No Yes No No No
Interrupt
Hardware No Yes No Yes No No No
interrupt upon
edge change

Adjustable input No Yes No Yes No No No


delays
Substitute value Yes
output
Special Features High Quick and Channel- Interrupt For high, For high, High
packaging with specific capability variable variable packaging
density interrupt isolation with low, voltages voltages density
capability variable
Input
voltages
characterist
ic curve to
IEC
61131-2

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-3
Digital Modules

Table 5-2 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance

SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422; SM 422;


Module DO 1624 DO DO 3224 DO 3224 DO DO DO
VDC/2 A 1620-125 VDC/0.5 A VDC/0.5 A 8120/230 16120/23 1620-120
VDC/1.5 A VAC/5 A 0 VAC/2 A VAC/
Characteristics (-1BH1x) (-5EH10) (-1BL00) (-7BL00) (-1FF00) (-1FH00) 2A
(-5EH00)
Number of 16 DO; 16 DO; 32 DO; 32 DO; 8 DO; 16 DO; 16 DO;
outputs isolated in isolated and isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in isolated in
groups of 8 reverse groups of groups of 8 groups of 1 groups of 4 groups of 1
polarity 32
protection
in groups of
8
Output current 2A 1.5 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 5A 2A 2A
Rated load 24 VDC 20 to 125 24 VDC 24 VDC 120/ 120/ 20 to
voltage VDC 230 VAC 230 VAC 120 VAC
Programmable No Yes No Yes No No Yes
diagnostics
Diagnostic No Yes No Yes No No Yes
Interrupt
Substitute value No Yes No Yes No No Yes
output
Special Features For high For variable High Particularly For high For variable
currents voltages packaging quick and currents currents
density with with with
interrupt channel- channel-
capability specific specific
isolation isolation

Table 5-3 Relay Output Module: Characteristics at a Glance

Module SM 422; DO 16  30/230 VUC/Rel. 5 A

Characteristics (-1HH00)

Number of Outputs 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8


Load Voltage 125 VDC
230 VAC
Special Features

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-4 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital


Module

Introduction
The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other
to commission digital modules successfully.
The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either
earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other
modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times.

Sequence of Steps

Table 5-4 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module

Step Procedure Refer To...


1. Select the module Section 5.1 and specific module section from
Section 5.8
2. Install the module in the SIMATIC S7 Installation section in the manual for the
network programmable controller being used:
S7-400/M7-400 Programmable Controllers,
Hardware and Installation
3. Assign parameters to module Section 5.3 and, if necessary, the specific module
section as of Section 5.7
4. Commission configuration Section on commissioning in the manual for the
programmable controller being used:
S7-400/M7-400 Programmable Controllers,
Hardware and Installation
5. If commissioning was not successful, Section 5.4
diagnose configuration

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-5
Digital Modules

5.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment

Introduction
Digital modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics
of dome modules by means of parameter assignment.

Tools for Parameter Assignment


You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7. You must perform parameter
assignment in STOP mode of the CPU.
When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the
programming device to the CPU. When there is a transition from STOP to RUN
mode, the CPU transfers the parameters to the individual digital modules.

Static and dynamic parameters


The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters.
Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above.
In addition, you can modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program in
an S7 programmable controller by means of SFCs. Note, however, that after a
change from RUN  STOP, STOP  RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in
STEP 7 apply again. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of
modules in the user program in Appendix A.

Parameter Settable with CPU Operating


Mode
Static PG (STEP7 HWCONFIG) STOP
Dynamic PG (STEP7 HWCONFIG) STOP
SFC 55 in the user program RUN

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-6 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.3.1 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

The parameterized digital input modules use a subset of the parameters and
ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on functionality. Refer to the
section on a particular digital module, starting from Section 5.7, to find out which
subset it is capable of using.
Dont forget that some digital modules have different time delays after parameter
assignment.
See Section 16.5 for a description of how to calculate response times.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 5-5 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules

Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Scope


Type
Enable
Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
Destination CPU for 1 to 4

Static Module
interrupt
Diagnostics
Wire break Yes/no No
Static Channel
No load voltage Yes/no No
L+/sensor supply
Trigger for hardware
interrupt Yes/no
Rising (positive) edge Yes/no
No Dynamic Channel
No
Falling (negative) edge
Input delay 0.1 ms (DC) 3 (DC) Static Channel
0.5 ms (DC)
3 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
Reaction to error Substitutea value (SV) SV Dynamic Module
Keep last value (KLV)
Substitute1 Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are
not available in ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CC (central controller) is It possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and
without HWCONFIG support.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-7
Digital Modules

5.3.2 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

The parameterized digital output modules use a subset of the parameters and
ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to
the section on the relevant digital module, starting from Section 5.15, to find out
which subset it is capable of using.
The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in
STEP 7.

Table 5-6 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules

Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Scope


Type
Enable
Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Destination CPU for 1 to 4

Static Module
interrupt
Reaction to CPU-STOP Substitute a value (SV) SV Dynamic Module
Keep last value (KLV)
Diagnostics
Wire break Yes/no No
No load voltage L+ Yes/no NoNo
Static Channel
Short circuit to M Yes/no No
Short circuit to L+ Yes/no No
Fuse blown Yes/no
Substitute 1 Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are
not available in ER-1/ ER-2.
2 Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings and
without support from HWCONFIG.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-8 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules

Programmable and Non-Programmable Diagnostic Messages


In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and
non-programmable diagnostic messages.
You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled
diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the
Diagnostics parameter block in STEP 7 (refer to Section 6.7).
Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the digital
module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled.

Actions Following Diagnostic Message in STEP 7


Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions:
The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnostics of the digital module,
forwarded to the CPU and can be read out by the user program.
The fault LED on the digital module lights up.
If you have parameterized Enable Diagnostic Interrupt in STEP 7, a diagnostic
interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called (refer to Section 5.5).

Reading Out Diagnostic Messages


You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user
program (refer to the Appendix Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules).
You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7 in the module diagnosis (refer to the
STEP 7 online help system).

Diagnostics Using the INTF and EXTF LEDs


Some digital modules indicate faults by means of their two fault LEDs INTF
(internal fault) and EXTF (external fault). The LEDs go out when all the internal
and external faults have been eliminated.
Refer to the technical specifications of the modules, starting at Section 5.7, to find
out which digital modules have these fault LEDs.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-9
Digital Modules

Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules


The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the digital
modules with diagnostics capability.
You can find out which diagnostic message each module is capable of in the
Appendix entitled Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules.

Table 5-7 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules

Diagnostic Message LED Scope of the Parameters Can


Diagnosis Be Assigned
Module problem INTF/EXTF Module No
Internal malfunction INTF Module No
External malfunction EXTF Module No
Channel error present INTF/EXTF Module No
External auxiliary supply missing EXTF Module No
Front connector missing EXTF Module No
Module not parameterized. INTF Module No
Wrong parameters INTF Module No
Channel information available INTF/EXTF Module No
STOP mode Module No
Internal voltage failure INTF Module No
EPROM error INTF Module No
Hardware interrupt lost INTF Module No
Parameter assignment error INTF Channel No
Short-circuit to M EXTF Channel Yes
Short-circuit to L+ EXTF Channel Yes
Wire break EXTF Channel Yes
Fuse blown INTF Channel Yes
Sensor supply missing EXTF Channel/channel
Yes
group
No load voltage L+ EXTF Channel/channel
Yes
group

Note
A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic
messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly
in STEP 7.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-10 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures for Digital Modules

Table 5-8 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures

Diagnostic Message Possible Error Cause Remedy


Module malfunction An error detected by the module has -
occurred
Internal malfunction The module has detected an error -
within the programmable controller
External malfunction The module has detected an error -
outside the programmable controller
There is a channel Indicates that only certain channels -
error are faulty
No external auxiliary Voltage required to operate the Supply missing voltage
voltage module is missing (load voltage,
sensor supply)
No front connector Jumper between connections 1 and Install jumper
2 in the front connector missing
Parameters have not The module requires the information Message queued after power-on until
been assigned to the as to whether it should work with parameter transmission by the CPU has
module system default parameters or with been completed; parameterize the
your parameters module, as required
Wrong parameters One parameter or the combination Reassign module parameter
of parameters is not plausible
Channel information Channel error present; the module -
available can supply additional channel
information
Operating mode STOP Module was not parameterized and If after rebooting the CPU all the input
the first module cycle has not been values are in the intermediate memory,
completed this message is reset
Internal voltage failure Module is defective Replace module
EPROM error Module is defective Replace module
Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an Change the interrupt handling in the CPU
interrupt, since the previous interrupt (change priority for interrupt OB; shorten
was not acknowledged; interrupt program)
configuration error possible

Parameter assignment Incorrect parameters transferred to Reassign module parameter


error the module (for example, impossible
input delay); the corresponding
channel is deactivated
Short circuit to M Overload of output Eliminate overload
Short-circuit of output to M Check the wiring of the outputs
Short circuit to L+ Short circuit of output to L+ Check the wiring of the outputs

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-11
Digital Modules

Table 5-8 Diagnostic Messages of the Digital Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures

Diagnostic Message Possible Error Cause Remedy


Wire break Lines interrupted Close circuit
No external sensor supply Wire sensors with 10 to 18 k
Channel not connected (open) Disable the Diagnostics Wire Break
parameter for the channel in STEP 7
Connect channel
Fuse blown One or more fuses on the module Remove the overload and replace the
has blown and caused this fault. fuse
No sensor supply Overload of sensor supply Eliminate overload
Short circuit of sensor supply to M Eliminate short circuit
No Power supply L+ to module missing Feed in supply voltage L+
load voltage L+
Fuse in module is defective Replace module

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-12 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.5 Interrupts of the Digital Modules

Introduction
This section describes the interrupt behavior of the digital modules. The following
interrupts exist:
Diagnostic Interrupt
Hardware interrupt
Note that not all digital modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable
of a subset of the interrupts described here. Refer to the technical specifications of
the modules, starting at Section 5.7, to find out which digital modules have
interrupt capability.
The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online help system for
STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail.

Enabling Interrupts
The interrupts are not preset in other words, they are inhibited without
appropriate parameter assignment. You enable the interrupts in STEP 7 (refer to
Section 6.7).

Special Feature: The Module is Inserted in ER-1/ER-2

Note
If you use the digital module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set the parameters for
enabling all the interrupts to No because the interrupt lines are not available in
ER-1/ER-2.

Diagnostic Interrupt
If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial
occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after
troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt.
The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the
diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82).
In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more
detailed diagnostic information from the module.
The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When
OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-13
Digital Modules

Hardware Interrupt
A digital input module can trigger a hardware interrupt for each channel at a rising
or falling edge, or both, of a signal status change.
You perform parameter assignment for each channel separately. It can be modified
at any time (in RUN mode using the user program).
Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU
(OB 40 to OB 47). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of the
priority classes with low priority.
In the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40 to OB 47) you can
specify how the programmable controller is to respond to an edge change. When
the hardware interrupt OB is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the
module.
For each channel the digital input module can buffer an interrupt that has not been
triggered. If no higher priority run-time levels are waiting to be processed, the
buffered interrupts (of all modules) are serviced one after the other by the CPU
according to the order in which they occurred.

Hardware Interrupt Lost


In an interrupt has been buffered for a channel and another interrupt occurs on that
channel before it has been processed by the CPU, a diagnostic interrupt hardware
interrupt lost is triggered.
More interrupts on this channel are not acquired until processing of the interrupt
buffered on this channel has been executed.

Interrupt-Triggering Channels
The interrupt-triggering channels are stored in the local data of the hardware
interrupt OBs (in the start information of the corresponding OB). The start
information is two words long (bits 0 to 31). The bit number is the channel number.
Bits 16 to 31 are not assigned.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-14 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.6 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs

IEC 61131, Type 1 and Type 2


The IEC 61131 standard requires the following for the input current:
In the case of type 2, an input current of  2 mA already at + 5 V
In the case of type 1, an input current of  0.5 mA already at + 5 V

EN 60947-5-2, Two-Wire BEROs


The standard for BEROs (EN 60947-5-2) specifies that there can be a current of
 1.5 mA for BEROs in the 0 signal state.
The input current of the module in the 0 signal state is decisive for the operation
of two-wire BEROs. This must be in accordance with BERO requirements.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-15
Digital Modules

Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs


As long as the current flowing into the module remains  1.5 mA, the module
recognizes this as a 0 signal.

Typ. switching threshold


(9.5 V) Resistance characteristic
I E (mA) curve

7 I min to IEC 61131; type 2


6

BERO
standard
I  1.5 mA

2 I min to IEC 61131; type 1


1.5
0.5

30 V 0 5 11 13 15 24 30 L+ (V)

0 1

L+

1
2-Wire BERO
0 I  1.5 mA --> 0 signal

PLC
input resistance
M

Figure 5-1 Input Characteristic Curve for Digital Inputs

IEC 61131, Type 1 in the Case of the Digital Input Module


(6ES7 421-1BL01-0AA0)
The input current in the case of the digital input module (6ES7 421-1BL01-0AA0)
reaches 1.5 mA only above the +5 V switching threshold but under the switching
threshold of the module (typ. 9.5 V). Therefore only type 1 can be specified with
the IEC 61131 standard.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-16 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.7 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32  24 VDC


(6ES7 421-1BL00-0AA0)

Characteristics
The SM 421;DI 32 x 24 VDC is a digital input module with the following features:
32 inputs, isolated in a group of 32. In other words, all inputs share the same
chassis ground.
Rated load voltage: 24 VDC
Suitable for switches and 2-wire proximity switches
(BEROs, IEC 61131; type 2).
The status LEDs indicate the process status.

Functional Expansion as of Version 03


The lower limit of the rated input range is increased at signal 0 from 3 to 30 V.
The rated input voltage for signal 0 is thus: 30 V to 5 V

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-17
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 421;
DI 32 x 24 VDC

Process Module

1
2
L+ 3 L+ t
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3
8 4
9 5
10 6
11 7
12
13
14 t

Data register and bus control


15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
21 6
22 7
23
24
25
26
t
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36
37
38 t
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
M 48 M

Figure 5-2 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32  24 VDC

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-18 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics


Dimensions W  H  D 25  290  210 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 600 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module
Substitute value can be applied No
Number of inputs 32
Sensor Selection Data
Length of cable
Input voltage
Unshielded Max. 600 m
Rated value 24 VDC
Shielded Max. 1000 m
For signal 1 11 V to 30 V
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
For signal 0 3 V to 5 V
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC 30 V to 5 V as of
electronics L+ version 03
Reverse polarity protection Yes Input current
Power failure buffering None At signal 1 6 mA to 8 mA
Number of inputs that can be 32 Input delay
triggered simultaneously At 0 to 1 1.2 ms to 4.8 ms
Isolation At 1 to 0 1.2 ms to 4.8 ms
Between channels and Yes Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131; type 2
backplane bus
Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible
Between channels and No
power supply of the Permitted bias current Max. 2.5 mA
electronics
Between the channels No
Permitted potential difference
Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits
Insulation tested with
Channels against 500 VDC
backplane bus and load
voltage L+
Current consumption
From the backplane bus Max. 30 mA
From supply voltage L+ Max. 30 mA
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 6 W

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-19
Digital Modules

5.8 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32  24 VDC;


(6ES7 421-1BL01-0AA0)

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 421; DI 32  24 VDC has the following features:
32 inputs, isolated in a group of 32
24 VDC rated input voltage
Suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire proximity switches (BEROs,
IEC 61131; type 1)
The status LEDs indicate the process status.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-20 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32  24 VDC

Process Module

1
2
L+ 3
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3
8 4
9 5
10 6
11 7 M
12
13
14
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4

Data register and bus control


20 5
21 6
22 7
23
24
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36
37
38
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
M 48 M

Figure 5-3 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32  24 VDC

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-21
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 32 x 24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics


Dimensions W  H  D 25  290  210 Status display Green LED per channel
(in millimeters)
Interrupts None
Weight Approx. 500 g
Diagnostic functions None
Data for Specific Module
Substitute value can be applied No
Number of inputs 32
Data for Selecting a Sensor
Length of cable
Input voltage
Unshielded Max. 600 m
Rated value 24 VDC
Shielded Max. 1000 m
For signal 1 13 V to 30 V
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
For signal 0 -30 V to 5 V
Power rated voltage of the Not required
Input current
electronics L+
At signal 1 7 mA
Number of inputs that can be 32
triggered simultaneously Input delay

Isolation At 0 to 1 1.2 ms to 4.8 ms

Between channels and Yes At 1 to 0 1.2 ms to 4.8 ms


backplane bus Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131; type 1
Between the channels No Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible
Permitted potential difference Permitted bias current Max. 1.5 mA
Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits
Insulation tested with
Channels against 500 VDC
backplane bus and load
voltage L+
Current consumption
From the backplane bus Max. 20 mA
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 6 W

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-22 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.9 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC;


(6ES7 421-7BH00-0AB0)

Characteristics
The digital input module SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC has the following features:
16 inputs, isolated in 2 groups of 8
24 VDC rated input voltage
Suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire proximity switches
(BEROs, IEC 61131; type 2)
2 short-circuit-proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each
External redundant power supply possible to supply sensors
Sensor supply (Vs) O.K. status display
Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
Programmable diagnostics
Programmable diagnostic interrupt
Programmable hardware interrupt
Programmable input delays
Parameterizable substitute values in the input range
The status LEDs indicate the process status.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-23
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC

Front connector monitoring


1 INTF
Monitoring of external auxiliary supply
2 EXTF 1L+ Monitoring of internal voltage
1L+ 3 1L+ 1L+
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2
9
10 3
11
12
24 V 1M
13 1Vs
14
Short-circuit 1L+
15 4 protection

Backplane bus interface


16
17 5 Monitoring of sensor supply 1Vs
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
1M 23 1M
1M
24 1M Monitoring of external auxiliary supply 2L+
25 2L+ Monitoring of internal voltage
2L+ 26 2L+
2L+
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
24 V
36 2M
37 Short-circuit 2L+
2Vs protection
38
39
4
40 Monitoring of sensor supply 2Vs
41
5
42
43
6
44
45
7
46
47
2M
2M 48 2M
2M
L+ M
24 V

Figure 5-4 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-24 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment Diagram for Redundant Supply of Sensors


The figure below shows how sensors can additionally be supplied by means of Vs
with a redundant voltage source for example, via another module).

L+ 1 L+
Short-circuit-
proof driver Vs
2 L+
Digital input M
module 
to the sensors

Figure 5-5 Terminal Assignment Diagram for the Redundant Supply of Sensors of the
SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC

Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC

Dimensions and Weight Voltages, Currents, Potentials


Dimensions W  H  D 25  290  210 Rated supply voltage of the 24 VDC
(in millimeters) electronics and sensor L+
Weight Approx. 600 g Reverse polarity protection Yes
Data for Specific Module Number of inputs that can be 16
triggered simultaneously
Number of inputs 16
Isolation
Length of cable
Unshielded
Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
input delay
0.1 ms Max. 20 m Between channels and No
power supply of the
0.5 ms Max. 50 m electronics
3 ms Max. 600 m
Between the channels Yes
Shielded
In groups of 2
input delay
0.1 ms Max. 30 m Permitted potential difference
0.5 ms Max. 70 m Between the different 75 VDC, 60 VAC
circuits
3 ms Max. 1000 m
Insulation tested with
Channels against 500 VDC
backplane bus and load
voltage L+
Channel groups between 500 VDC
themselves
Current consumption
From the backplane bus Max. 130 mA
From the power supply L+ Max. 120 mA
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 5 W

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-25
Digital Modules

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Data for Selecting a Sensor


Status display Green LED per channel Input voltage
Interrupts Rated value 24 VDC
Hardware interrupt Parameters can be For signal 1 11 V to 30 V
assigned For signal 0 -30 V to 5 V
Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be Input current
assigned
At signal 1 6 mA to 12 mA
Diagnostic functions
At signal 0 < 6 mA
Monitoring of the power Yes
Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131;
supply voltage of the
type 2
electronics
Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible
Load voltage monitor Green LED per group
Permitted bias current Max. 3 mA
Group error display
Time, Frequency
For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
Internal preparation time for
For external fault Red LED (EXTF)
Channel error display (F) None
Only hardware interrupt
enable Max. 70 s
Diagnostic information can Yes Input delay the same
be displayed for both channel groups
Monitoring for Input delay not the Max. 120 s
Wire break I < 1 mA same for both channel
groups
Substitute value can be applied Yes
Enable hardware and Max. 5 ms
Sensor Power Supply Outputs diagnostic interrupts
Number of outputs 2 Input delay
Output voltage Parameters can be Yes
with load Min. L+(2.5 V) assigned
Output current Rated value 0.1/0.5/3 ms
Rated value 120 mA Input frequency (at 0.1 ms < 2kHz
Permitted range 0 to 150 mA time delay)
Additional (redundant) supply Possible Sensor Circuit
Short-circuit protection Yes, electronic Resistance circuit of the sensor 10 to 18 k
for wire break monitoring

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-26 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.9.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC

Parameter Assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
digital modules in Section 6.7.

Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC


You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings
for the SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC in the table below.

Table 5-9 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC

Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Scope


Type
Enable
Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
Destination CPU for 1 to 4

Static Module
interrupt
Diagnostics
Channel
Wire break Yes/no No
Static Channel
No load voltage Yes/no No
group
L+/sensor supply
Trigger for hardware
interrupt
Dynamic Channel
Rising edge Yes/no
Falling edge Yes/no
Input delay 3 ms (DC) 3 (DC) Static Channel
0.1 ms (DC) group
0.5 ms (DC/AC)
Reaction to Error Substitute a Value (SV) SV Dynamic Module
Keep Last Value (KLV)
Enable substitute value 1 Yes/no No Dynamic Channel

1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are not
available in ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

Assignment of the Encoder Supplies to Channel Groups


The two encoder supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups:
inputs 0 to 7 and inputs 8 to 15. In these two channel groups, you parameterize the
diagnostics for the encoder supply, too.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-27
Digital Modules

Ensuring a Wire Break Check Is Carried Out


To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor
circuit using a resistor of 10 to 18 k The resistor should be connected parallel to
the contact and should be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor.
This additional resistor is not required in the following cases:
If two-wire BEROs are used
If you dont parameterize the Wire Break diagnosis

Setting the Input Delay for Channel Groups


You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the
setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to
inputs 8 to 15.

Note
The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15)
must be equal to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as
being incorrectly parameterized.
Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after
acknowledgement.

Optimum Signal Propagation Delay


You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings:
Both channel groups are parameterized with an input delay of 0.1 ms
All the diagnoses (load voltage error, wire break) are deactivated
Diagnostic interrupt is not enabled

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-28 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.9.2 Behavior of the SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC

Effect of Operating Mode and Supply Voltage on the Input Values


The input values of the SM 421; DI 16  24 DC depend on the operating mode of
the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 5-10 How the Input Values Depend on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the
Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC

CPU Operating Mode Power Supply L+ Input Value of Digital Module


to Digital Module
POWER ON RUN L+ exists Process value
L+ missing 0 signal *
STOP L+ exists Process value
L+ missing 0 signal*
POWER L+ exists
OFF
L+ missing

* Depends on the parameter assignment (see Table 5-11)

Behavior upon Failure of the Supply Voltage


Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 421; DI 16  24 DC is always indicated by
the EXTF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on
the module (entry in diagnosis).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see
Section 5.9.1).

Short-Circuit of Sensor Supply Vs


Irrespective of the parameter assignment, the corresponding Vs LED goes out if a
short-circuit of the encoder supply Vs occurs.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-29
Digital Modules

Effect of Errors and Parameter Assignment on the Input Values


The input values of the SM 421; DI 16  24 DC are affected by certain errors and
the parameter assignment of the module. The following table lists the effects on
the input values.
You will find more diagnostic messages of the module in the Appendix entitled
Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules.

Table 5-11 How the Input Values Are Affected by Faults and by the Parameter Assignment of the
SM 421; DI 16  24 VDC

Diagnostic Message Diagnostics Reaction to Input Value of Digital Module


Parameter Error
Parameter
Module not Cannot be Not relevant 0 signal (all channels)
parameterized disabled
No front connector SV Parameterized substitute value
KLV Last read, valid value
Incorrect parameters Cannot be Not relevant 0 signal (module/all incorrectly
(module/channel) disabled parameterized channels)
STOP operating mode Cannot be Process value (not updated)
disabled
Internal voltage failure Cannot be SV Parameterized substitute value
disabled
KLV Last read, valid value
Hardware interrupt lost Cannot be Not relevant Current process value
disabled
Wire break (for each Deactivated 0 signal
channel)
Activated SV Parameterized substitute value
KLV Last read, valid value
Sensor supply missing Deactivated 0 signal
(also activated via No
Activated SV Parameterized substitute value
Load Voltage L+)
KLV Last read, valid value
No load voltage L+ (for Deactivated 0 signal, if the contact is connected via the
each channel group) sensor supply; process value for the
external sensor supply
Activated SV Parameterized substitute value
KLV Last read, valid value

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-30 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Behavior when the Input Delay Equals 0.1 ms and an Error Occurs
If you have parameterized the following:
An input delay of 0.1 ms
KLV or SV as the response to an error
Substitute 1
In the event of a fault on a channel that has a 1 signal, the following could occur
before the last valid value or the substitute value 1 is output:
An 0 signal may be briefly output
If parameterized, a hardware interrupt may be generated

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-31
Digital Modules

5.10 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16  120 VAC;


(6ES7 421-5EH00-0AA0)

Characteristics
The SM 421; DI 16  120 VAC has the following features:
16 inputs, isolated
120 VAC rated input voltage
Suitable for switches and two-wire proximity switches
(BEROs, IEC 61131; type 2)

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-32 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16  120 VAC

Process 1
2
Byte 0 3
4 0
5 1N
6 1
7 2N
8 2
9 3N
10 3
11 4N
12
13
14
15 4
16 5N
17 5
18 6N
19 6
20 7N
21 7
22 8N
23
24
25
Byte 1 26
27 0
28 9N
29 1
30 10N
31 2
32 11N
33 3
34 12N
35
36
37
38
39 4
40 13N
41 5
42 14N
43 6
44 15N
45 7
46 16N
47
48

Figure 5-6 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16  120 VAC

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-33
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16  120 VAC

Dimensions and Weight Sensor Selection Data


Dimensions W  H D 25  290  210 Input voltage
(in millimeters) Rated value 120 V
Weight Approx. 650 g For signal 1 72 to 132 VAC
Data for Specific Module For signal 0 0 to 20 V
Number of inputs 16 Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz

Length of cable Input current


Unshielded 600 m At signal 1 6 to 20 mA
Shielded 1000 m At signal 0 0 to 4 mA

Voltages, Currents, Potentials Input delay

Number of inputs that can be 16


At 0 to 1 2 to 15 ms
triggered simultaneously At 1 to 0 5 to 25 ms

Horizontal configuration 16 Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131; type 2


Up to 60 C Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible
Vertical configuration 16 Permitted bias current Max. 4 A
Up to 40 C
Isolation
Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
Between the channels Yes
In groups of 1
Permitted potential difference
Between Minternal and the 120 VAC
inputs
Between the inputs of the 250 VAC
different groups
Insulation tested with 1500 VAC
Current consumption
From the backplane bus Max. 0.1 A
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 3.0 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-34 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.11 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16  24/60 VUC;


(6ES7 421-7DH00-0AB0)

Characteristics
The SM 421; DI 16  24/60 VUC is characterized by the following features:
16 inputs, individually isolated
Rated input voltage 24 VUC to 60 VUC
Suitable for switches and two-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
Programmable diagnostics
Programmable diagnostic interrupt
Programmable hardware interrupt
Programmable input delays
The status LEDs indicate the process status.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-35
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16  24/60 VUC

Process Module
1 INTF
Front connector jumper
2 EXTF
3
L 4 0 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
5 1N
L 6 1 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
7 2N
L 8 2 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
9 3N
L 10 3 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
11 4N
12
13
14
L 15 4 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
16 5N
L 17 5 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
18 6N
L 19 6 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
20 7N

Data register and bus control


L 21 7 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
22 8N
23
24
25
26
L 27 0 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
28 9N
L 29 1 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
30 10 N
L 31 2 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
32 11 N
L 33 3 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
34 12 N
35
36
37
38
L 39 4 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
40 13 N
L 41 5 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
42 14 N
L 43 6 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
44 15 N
L 45 7 Input
N Adaptation Diagnostics
46 16 N
47
48

Figure 5-7 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16  24/60 VUC

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-36 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16  24/60 VUC

Dimensions and Weight For external fault Red LED (EXTF)


Dimensions W H D 25  290  210 Channel error display (F) None
(in millimeters)
Diagnostic information can Possible
Weight Approx. 600 g be displayed
Data for Specific Module Monitoring for
Number of inputs 16 Wire break I > 0.7 mA
Length of cable Substitute value can be applied No
Unshielded Sensor Selection Data
input delay
Input voltage
0.5 ms Max. 100 m
Rated value 24 VUC to 60 VUC
3 ms Max. 600 m
10 / 20 ms Max. 600 m
For signal 1 15 to 72 VDC
-15 VDC to -72 VDC
Shielded line length 1000 m
15 to 60 VAC
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
For signal 0 -6 VDC to +6 VDC
Number of inputs that can be 16 0 VAC to 5 VAC
triggered simultaneously
Frequency range 47 DC/AC to 63 Hz
Isolation
Between channels and Yes Input current
backplane bus At signal 1 Typ. 4 mA to 10 mA
Between the channels Yes Input characteristic curve Similar to IEC 61131 1)
In groups of 1 Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible
Permitted potential difference Permitted bias current Max. 0.5 mA to 2 mA2)
Between the different 75 VDC, 60 VAC Time, Frequency
circuits Internal preparation time for
Insulation tested with Only hardware interrupt Max. 450 s
Channels against 1500 VAC enable
backplane bus and load Enable hardware and Max. 2 ms
voltage L+ diagnostic interrupts
Channels among one 1500 VAC Input delay
another
Parameters can be Yes
Current consumption assigned
From the backplane bus Max.150 mA
Rated value 0.5/3/10/20 ms
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 8 W
Sensor Circuit
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Resistance circuit of the sensor
Status display Green LED per channel for wire break monitoring
Interrupts Rated voltage 24 V 18 k
Hardware interrupt Parameters can be (15 V to 35 V)
assigned Rated voltage 48 V 39 k
Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be (30 V to 60 V)
assigned Rated voltage 60 V 56 k
Diagnostic functions Parameters can be (50 V to 72V)
assigned
Group error display
For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
1) IEC 61131 does not specify any data for UC modules. The values have been adapted as much as
possible to IEC 61131.
2) Minimum closed-circuit current is required for wire break monitoring.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-37
Digital Modules

5.11.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 421; DI 16  24/60 VUC

Parameter Assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
digital modules in Section 6.7.

Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16  24/60 VUC


The following table contains an overview of the parameters you can set and their
default settings for the SM 421; DI 16  24/60 VUC.

Table 5-12 Parameters of the SM 421; DI 16  24/60 VUC

Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Scope


Type
Enable
Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Hardware interrupt1 Yes/no No
Destination CPU for interrupt 1 to 4 Static Module
Diagnostics
Wire break Yes/no No Static Channel
Trigger for hardware interrupt
Rising (positive) edge Yes/no Dynamic Channel
Falling (negative) edge Yes/no
Input delay3 0.5 ms (DC) 3 (DC) Static Channel group
3 ms (DC)
20 ms (DC/AC)
1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are
not available in ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.
3 If you assign 0.5 ms , then you should not parameterize a diagnosis because the internal processing time
for diagnostic functions can be > 0.5 ms.

Ensuring a Wire Break Check Is Carried Out


To ensure that a wire break check is carried out, you require an external sensor
circuit using a resistor of 18 to 56 k The resistor should be connected parallel to
the contact and should be arranged as closely as possible to the sensor.
This additional resistor is not required in the following cases:
If two-wire BEROs are used
If you dont parameterize the Wire Break diagnosis

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-38 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Setting the Input Delay for Channel Groups


You can only set the input delay for each group of channels. In other words, the
setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7 and the setting for channel 8 applies to
inputs 8 to 15.

Note
The parameters that are entered for the remaining channels (1 to 7 and 9 to 15)
must be equal to the value 0 or 8, otherwise those channels will be reported as
being incorrectly parameterized.
Any hardware interrupts that have occurred in the meantime will be reported after
acknowledgement.

Optimum Signal Propagation Delays


You can achieve the fastest signal propagation delay with the following settings:
Both channel groups are parameterized with an input delay of 0.5 ms
The Diagnostics parameter is disabled
The Diagnostic Interrupt parameter is disabled

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-39
Digital Modules

5.12 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC;


(6ES7 421-1FH00-0AA0)

Characteristics
The SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC is characterized by the following features:
16 inputs, isolated
Rated input voltage 120/230 VAC/VDC
Suitable for switches and two-wire proximity switches

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-40 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC

Process Module
1
2
3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2

Data register and bus control


9
10 3
11
12
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
36 3N
37
38
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
47
48 4N

Figure 5-8 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-41
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor


Dimensions W H D 25  290  210 Input voltage
(in millimeters) Rated value 120/230 VUC
Weight Approx. 650 g For signal 1 79 to 264 VAC
Data for Specific Module 80 to 264 VDC
Number of inputs 16 For signal 0 0 VUC to 40 VUC

Length of cable Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz


Unshielded 600 m Input current
Shielded 1000 m At signal 1 2 mA to 5 mA
Voltages, Currents, Potentials At signal 0 0 to 1 mA

Number of inputs that can be Input delay


triggered simultaneously At 0 to 1 5 to 25 ms
Horizontal configuration 16 at 120 V At 1 to 0 5 to 25 ms
Up to 60 C 8 at 240 V Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131; type 1
16 with fan Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible
subassembly
Permitted bias current Max. 1 mA
Up to 40 C 16
Isolation
Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
Between the channels Yes
In groups of 4
Permitted potential difference
Between Minternal and the 230 VAC
inputs
Between the inputs of the 500 VAC
different groups
Insulation tested with 1500 VAC
Current consumption
From the backplane bus Max. 0.1 A
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 3.5 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-42 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.13 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC;


(6ES7 421-1FH20-0AA0)

Characteristics
The SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC is characterized by the following features:
16 inputs, isolated in groups of 4
Rated input voltage 120/230 VUC
Input characteristic curve to IEC 61131; type 2
Suitable for switches and two-wire proximity switches (BEROs)
The status LEDs indicate the process status.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-43
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC

Process Module
1
2
3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2

Data register and bus control


9
10 3
11
12
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
36 3N
37
38
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
47
48 4N

Figure 5-9 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 16  120/230 VUC

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-44 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 16 x 120/230 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor


Dimensions W  H  D 25  290  210 Input voltage
(in millimeters) Rated value 120/230 VUC
Weight Approx. 650 g For signal 1 74 to 264 VAC
Data for Specific Module 80 to 264 VDC
80 to 264 VDC
Number of inputs 16
For signal 0 0 to 40 VAC
Length of cable 40 to +40 VDC
Unshielded 600 m Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
Shielded 1000 m
Input current
Voltages, Currents, Potentials At signal 1 (120 V) Typ. 10 mA AC
Power rated voltage of the None Typ. 1.8 mA DC
electronics L+ At signal 1 (230 V) Typ. 14 mA AC
Number of inputs 16 Typ. 2 mA DC
that can be triggered
simultaneously
Isolation At signal 0 0 to 6 mA AC
Between channels and Yes 0 to 2 mA DC
backplane bus
Input delay
Between the channels Yes At 0 to 1 Max. 20 ms AC
In groups of 4 Max. 15 ms DC
Permitted potential difference At 1 to 0 Max. 30 ms AC
Between Minternal and the 250 VAC Max. 25 ms DC
inputs Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131;
Between the inputs of the 500 VAC type 2
different groups Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible
Insulation tested with Permitted bias current Max. 5 mA AC
Channels against 1500 VAC
backplane bus and load
voltage L+
Channels among one 2000 VAC
another
Current consumption
From the backplane bus Max. 80 mA
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 12 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per
channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None
Substitute value can be applied No

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-45
Digital Modules

5.14 Digital Input Module SM 421; DI 32  120 VUC;


(6ES7 421-1EL00-0AA0)

Characteristics
The SM 421; DI 32  120 VUC is characterized by the following features:
32 inputs, isolated
Rated input voltage 120 VAC/VDC
Suitable for switches and two-wire proximity switches

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-46 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32  120 VUC

Process Module
1
2
3
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3
8 4
9 5
10 6
11 7
12
13 1N
14

Data register and bus control


15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
21 6
22 7
23
24 2N
25
26
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36 3N
37
38
39 0
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
48 4N

Figure 5-10 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 421; DI 32  120 VUC

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-47
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 421; DI 32  120 VUC

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting a Sensor


Dimensions W  H  D (mm) 25  290  210 Input voltage
Rated value 120 VUC
Weight Approx. 600 g For signal 1 79 to 132 VAC

Data for Specific Module 80 VDC to 132 VDC


For signal 0 0 to 20 V
Number of inputs 32
Length of cable
Frequency range 47 to 63 Hz

Unshielded 600 m Input current


Shielded 1000 m At signal 1 2 mA to 5 mA

Voltages, Currents, Potentials


At signal 0 0 to 1 mA
Input delay
Rated load voltage L+ 79 to 132 VAC
80 to 132 VDC
At 0 to 1 5 to 25 ms
At 1 to 0 5 to 25 ms
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Input characteristic curve To IEC 61131; type 1
Number of inputs that can be 32
triggered simultaneously Connection of two-wire BEROs Possible

Horizontal configuration 32 Permitted bias current Max.1 mA

Up to 60 C
Vertical configuration 32
Up to 40 C
Isolation
Between channels and Yes
backplane bus
Between the channels Yes
In groups of 8
Permitted potential difference
Between Minternal and the 120 VAC
inputs
Between the inputs of the 250 VAC
different groups
Insulation tested with 1500 VAC
Current consumption
From the backplane bus Max. 0.2 A
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 6.5 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-48 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.15 Digital Output Module SM 422;


DO 16  24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7 422-1BH10-0AA0)

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A has the following
features.
16 outputs, isolated in two groups of 8
2 A output current
24 VDC rated load voltage
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is
not inserted.

Caution
! To commission the module, the rated load voltage must be applied at least once to
each group of 8 outputs (e.g. connection of 1L and 3L). If voltage is not applied to
a group due, for example, to 1L and 2L failing, all the outputs switch off, even
those in the second group. The status LED continues to function in the same way.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-49
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A

Process Module

1
1L+ 2
3 1L+
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2
9
3

Data register and bus control


11
12
2L+ 13 2L+
14 2L+
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23 1M
24
3L+
25 3L+
26 3L+
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
4L+ 36
37 4L+
38 4L+
39 4
40
41 5
42
LED control

43 6
44
45 7
46
47 2M
48 2M
M L+

Figure 5-11 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-50 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator


Dimensions W  H  D 25  290  210 Output voltage
(in millimeters) At signal 1 Min. L+ (-0,5 V)
Weight Approx. 600 g Output current
Data for Specific Module At signal 1
Number of outputs 16 Rated value 2A
Length of cable Permitted range 5 mA to 2.4 A
Unshielded 600 m
At signal 0 (leakage Max. 0.5 mA
Shielded 1000 m current)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Output delay (for resistive load)
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC From 0 to 1 Max. 1 ms
electronics L+
At 1 to 0 Max. 1 ms
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
Load resistor range 12  to 4 k
Aggregate current of
Lamp load Max. 10 W
the outputs (two outputs
per supply group) Parallel connection of 2
outputs
Horizontal configuration
Up to 40 C Max. 3 A For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load of the same group)
Up to 60 C Max. 2 A
Isolation
To increase performance Not possible

Between channels and Yes Triggering a digital input Possible


backplane bus Switch rate
Between the channels Yes For resistive load 100 Hz
In groups of 8 For inductive load to IEC 0.2 Hz at 1 A
947-51, DC 13 0.1 Hz at 2A
Permitted potential difference
Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
For lamp load Max. 10 Hz
circuits Limit (internal) of the inductive Max. -30 V
circuit interruption voltage up to
Insulation tested with
Short-circuit protection Electronically cyclic1)
Channels against 500 VDC
of output1
backplane bus and load
voltage L+ Threshold on 2.8 to 6A

Between the outputs of the 500 VDC 1 Following a short circuit, reconnection with full load is
different groups
not guaranteed. To prevent this, you can do one of the
Current consumption following:
From the backplane bus Max. 160 mA Change the signal at the output
Power supply and load Max. 30 mA Interrupt the load voltage of the module, or
voltage L+ (no load) Briefly disconnect the load from the output
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 5 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-51
Digital Modules

5.16 Digital Output Module SM 422;


DO 16  24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7 422-1BH11-0AA0)

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A has the following
features.
16 outputs, isolated in two groups of 8
2 A output current
24 VDC rated load voltage
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is
not inserted.

A Note about Commissioning


The following technical feature applies to the digital output module SM 422;
DO 16  24 VDC/2 A with the order number 6ES7 422-1BH11-0AA0 but not to the
digital output module SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A with the order number
6ES7 422-1BH10-0AA0:
To commission the module, it is no longer necessary to apply load voltage (1L+
and 3L+, for example,) to each group of 8 outputs. The module is fully operative
even if only one group is supplied with L+.
Note:
It is no longer possible to switch off all the outputs by disconnecting one single L+
supply as might have been the case with the previous module
(6ES7 422-1BH10-0AA0).

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-52 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A

Process Module

1
1L+ 2
3 1L+
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2
9
3

Data register and bus control


11
12
2L+ 13 2L+
14 2L+
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23 1M
24
3L+
25 3L+
26 3L+
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
4L+ 36
37 4L+
38 4L+
39 4
40
41 5
42
LED control

43 6
44
45 7
46
47 2M
48 2M
M L+

Figure 5-12 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-53
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16  24 VDC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator


Dimensions W  H  D 25  290  210 Output voltage
(in millimeters) At signal 1 Min. L+ (-0,5 V)
Weight Approx. 600 g Output current
Data for Specific Module At signal 1
Number of outputs 16 Rated value 2A
Length of cable Permitted range 5 mA to 2.4 A
Unshielded 600 m
At signal 0 (leakage Max. 0.5 mA
Shielded 1000 m current)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Output delay (for resistive load)
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC From 0 to 1 Max. 1 ms
electronics L+
At 1 to 0 Max. 1 ms
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
Load resistor range 24  to 4 k
Aggregate current of
Lamp load Max. 10 W
the outputs (two outputs
per supply group) Parallel connection of 2
outputs
Horizontal configuration
Up to 40 C Max. 3 A For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load of the same group)
Up to 60 C Max. 2 A
Isolation
To increase performance Not possible

Between channels and Yes Triggering a digital input Possible


backplane bus Switch rate
Between the channels Yes For resistive load 100 Hz
In groups of 8 For inductive load to IEC 0.2 Hz at 1 A
947-51, DC 13 0.1 Hz at 2A
Permitted potential difference
Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
For lamp load Max. 10 Hz
circuits Limit (internal) of the inductive Max. -30 V
circuit interruption voltage up to
Insulation tested with
Short-circuit protection Electronically cyclic1)
Channels against 500 VDC
of output1
backplane bus and load
voltage L+ Threshold on 2.8 A to 6 A

Between the outputs of the 500 VDC 1 Following a short circuit, reconnection with full load is
different groups
not guaranteed. To prevent this, you can do one of the
Current consumption following:
From the backplane bus Max. 160 mA Change the signal at the output, or
Power supply and load Max. 30 mA Interrupt the load voltage of the module
voltage L+ (no load) Briefly disconnect the load from the output
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 5 W
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-54 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.17 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16  20-125 VDC/1.5 A;


(6ES7 422-5EH10-0AB0)

Characteristics
The SM 422; DO 16  20-125 VDC/1.5 A has the following features:
16 outputs, each channel is fused; reverse polarity protection and isolated in
groups of 8
1.5 A output current
Rated load voltage 20 to 125 VDC
Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
Programmable diagnostics
Programmable diagnostic interrupt
Programmable substitute value output

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-55
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16  20-125 VDC/1.5 A

Process 1 INTF
2 EXTF
Byte 0 3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2
9
10 3
11
12
-+ 13 L1+
14 L1+
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22
23 M1
24
25
Byte 1 26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34
35
36
-+ 37 L2+
38 L2+
39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46
47 M2
48 M2

Figure 5-13 Terminal Assignment Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16  20-125 VDC/1.5 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-56 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16  20-125 VDC/1.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator


Dimensions W  H  D 25  290  210 Output voltage
(in millimeters) At signal 1 Min. L+ (1,0 V)
Weight Approx. 800 g Output current
Data for Specific Module At signal 1
Number of outputs 16 Rated value 1.5 A
Length of cable Permitted range 10 mA to 1.5 A
Unshielded Max. 600 m
Permitted surge current Max. 3 A
Shielded Max. 1000 m (for 10 ms)
Voltages, Currents, Potentials At signal 0 (leakage Max. 0.5 mA
Rated load voltage L1 20 VDC to 138 VDC current)
Reverse polarity protection Yes, with fuse Output delay (for resistive load)
Total current of the outputs 1) From 0 to 1 Max. 2 ms
Horizontal installation With fan subassembly At 1 to 0 Max. 13 ms
Up to 40 C Max. 16 A 21 A Parallel connection of 2
Up to 60 C Max. 8 A 14 A outputs
Isolation For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
Between channels and Yes a load of the same group)
backplane bus To increase performance Possible (only outputs
of the same group)
Between the channels Yes
In groups of 8 Triggering a digital input Possible

Permitted potential difference Switch rate

Between the outputs of the 250 VAC For resistive load Max. 10 Hz
different groups For inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz
Insulation tested with 1500 VAC to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13

Current consumption Short-circuit protection Electronically


of output protected2)
From the backplane bus Max. 700 mA
From load voltage L + Max. 2 mA
Threshold on Typ. 04 A to 5 A
(without load) Replacement fuses Fuse, 8 A/250 V, quick
Power dissipation of the module Typ. 10 W blow

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics


Status display Green LED per channel 1) To achieve maximum performance capability,
Interrupts distribute the high-current load between the two
Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be
groups.
2) To reset a deactivated output,
assigned
first set the output signal to 0 and then to 1.
Diagnostic functions Parameters can be
assigned If output signal 1 is written to a deactivated
output and the short circuit remains, additional
Group error display interrupts are generated (provided the diagnostic
For internal fault Red LED (INTF) interrupt parameter was set).

For external fault Red LED (EXTF)


Diagnostic information Yes
readable
Substitute value can be applied Yes, programmable

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-57
Digital Modules

Note
If the power supply is switched on by means of a mechanical contact, a voltage
pulse may occur at the outputs. The transient pulse lasts a maximum of 0.5 ms.

Changing Fuses

Warning
! This can result in injury.
If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you
could be injured by an electric shock.
Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-58 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.17.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 16  20-125 VDC/1.5 A

Parameter Assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
digital modules in Section 6.7.

Parameters of the SM 421; DO 16  20-125 VDC/1.5 A


You will find an overview of the parameters you can set and their default settings
for the SM 422; DO 16  20-125 VDC/1.5 A in the following table.

Table 5-13 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 16 20-125 VDC/1.5 A

Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Scope


Type
Enable
Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Destination CPU for 1 to 4

Static Module
interrupt
Reaction to CPU-STOP Substitute a value (SV) SV Dynamic Module
Keep last value (KLV)
Diagnostics
No load voltage L+ Yes/no
No Channel
Short circuit to M Static group
No
Yes/no
Channel
Enable substitute value Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1
1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are
not available in ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

Assigning the No Load Voltage L+ Diagnosis to Channel Groups


You can only set the No Load Voltage L+ diagnosis separately for each channel
group. In other words, the setting for channel 0 applies to inputs 0 to 7, and the
setting for channel 8 applies to inputs 8 to 15.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-59
Digital Modules

5.18 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A;


(6ES7 422-1BL00-0AA0)

Characteristics
The SM 422; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following features:
32 outputs, isolated in a group of 32
0.5 A output current
24 VDC rated load voltage
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is
not inserted.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-60 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A

Process Module
1
1L+
2
3 1L+
4 0
5 1
6 2
7 3
8 4
9 5
6

Data register and bus control


11 7
12
2L+ 13 2L+
14 2L+
15 0
16 1
17 2
18 3
19 4
20 5
21 6
22 7
23
24
3L+ 25 3L+
26 3L+
27 0
28 1
29 2
30 3
31 4
32 5
33 6
34 7
35
36
4L+ 37 4L+
38 4L+
39 0
LED control
40 1
41 2
42 3
43 4
44 5
45 6
46 7
47
48 M
L+ M

Figure 5-14 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-61
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator


Dimensions W  H  D 25  290  210 Output voltage
(in millimeters) At signal 1 Min. L+ (-0,3 V)
Weight Approx. 600 g Output current
Data for Specific Module At signal 1
Number of outputs 32 Rated value 0.5 A
Length of cable Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
Unshielded 600 m At signal 0 (leakage Max. 0.3 mA
Shielded 1000 m current)

Voltages, Currents, Potentials Output delay (for resistive


load)
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC
electronics L+ From 0 to 1 Max. 1 ms

Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC At 1 to 0 Max. 1 ms

Aggregate current of Load resistor range 48  to 4 k


the outputs (per supply group Lamp load Max. 5 W
of 8 outputs)
Parallel connection of 2
Horizontal configuration outputs
Up to 40 C Max. 4 A
For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs of
Up to 60 C Max. 2 A a load the same group)
Isolation To increase performance Possible (only outputs of
Between channels and Yes the same group)
backplane bus
Triggering a digital input Possible
Between the channels No Switch rate
Permitted potential difference For resistive load Max. 100 Hz
Between the different 75 VDC / 60 VAC
circuits For inductive load Max. 2 Hz at 0.3 A
to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13 Max. 0.5 Hz at 0.5 A
Insulation tested with
For lamp load Max. 10 Hz
Channels against 500 VDC
backplane bus and load Limit (internal) of the inductive Typ. 27 V
voltage L+ circuit interruption voltage up to

Load voltage L+ against 500 VDC Short-circuit protection of the Electronically cyclic
backplane bus output
Threshold on Typ. 0.7 A to 1.5 A
Current consumption
From the backplane bus Max. 200 mA
Power supply and load Max. 30 mA
voltage L+ (no load)
Power dissipation of the Typ. 4 W
module
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Status display Green LED per channel
Interrupts None
Diagnostic functions None

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-62 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.19 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A;


(6ES7 422-7BL00-0AB0)

Characteristics
The digital output module SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A has the following
features:
32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8
0.5 A output current
24 VDC rated load voltage
Group error display for internal faults (INTF) and external faults (EXTF)
Programmable diagnostics
Programmable diagnostic interrupt
Programmable substitute value output
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is
not inserted.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-63
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A

Module Process

1L+ monitoring 1
1L+ INTF
2
Monitoring of internal voltage EXTF
3 1L+
1L+ +
Control Control 4
0
Channel 5
status 1
LED 6
Diagnostics 2
7
3
8
Output status 4
9
5
10
6
7 11
1M 1M 12 1M

2L+ 13
2L+ 2L+ 14 2L+
+
0 15

1 16

2 17
3 18

4 19
5 20
6 21
Backplane bus interface

7 22
2M 23
2M
2M 24
3L+ 25
3L+ 3L+ 26 3L+
+
0 27
1 28
2 29
3 30
4 31
5 32
6 33
7 34
3M
3M 35
3M 36
4L+ 37
4L+ 4L+
4L+ 38
+
0 39
1 40
2 41
3 42
4 43
5 44
6 45
7 46
4M 47
4M 4M 48
L+

24 V

Figure 5-15 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-64 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A

Dimensions and Weight Diagnostic functions


Dimensions W  H  D 25  290  210 Monitoring of the load Yes
(in millimeters) voltage
Weight Approx. 600 g Group error display
Data for Specific Module For internal fault Red LED (INTF)
Number of outputs 32 For external fault Red LED (EXTF)
Length of cable Diagnostic information Yes
Unshielded 600 m readable
Shielded 1000 m Monitoring for
Voltages, Currents, Potentials Short circuit > 1 A (typ.)
Power rated voltage of the 24 VDC Wire break < 0.15 mA
electronics L+
Substitute value can be applied Yes
Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC
Data for Selecting an Actuator
Total current of the outputs (per
group) Output voltage

Horizontal configuration
At signal 1 Min. L + ( 0.8 V)

Up to 40 C Max. 4 A Output current


Up to 60 C Max. 2 A At signal 1
Isolation Rated value 0.5 A
Between channels and Yes Permitted range 5 mA to 0.6 A
backplane bus At signal 0 (leakage Max. 0.5 mA
Between the channels Yes current)
In groups of 8 Load resistor range 48  to 4 k
Permitted potential difference Parallel connection of 2
outputs
Between the different 75 VDC, 60 VAC
circuits For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load of the same group)
Insulation tested with
Channels against 500 VDC
To increase performance Possible (only outputs
of the same group)
backplane bus and load
voltage L+ Triggering a digital input Possible
Between the outputs of the 500 VDC Switch rate
different groups
For resistive load Max. 100 Hz
Current consumption
For inductive load Max. 2 Hz
From the backplane bus Max. 200 mA to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13
Power supply and load Max. 120 mA
voltage L+ (no load) For lamp load Max. 2 Hz

Power dissipation of the module Typ. 8 W Limit (internal) of the inductive Typ. L + ( 45 V)
circuit interruption voltage up to
Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics
Short-circuit protection of the Electronically cyclic
Status display Green LED per channel output
Interrupts Threshold on Typ. 0.75 A to 1.5 A
Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be
Hardware interrupt assigned
Parameters can be
assigned

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-65
Digital Modules

5.19.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A

Parameter Assignment
You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to
digital modules in Section 6.7.

Parameters of the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A


You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default
settings for the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A in the table below.

Table 5-14 Parameters of the SM 422; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A (6ES7 422-7BL00-0AB0)

Parameter Value Range Default2 Parameter Scope


Type
Enable
Diagnostic interrupt1 Yes/no No Dynamic Module
Destination CPU for 1 to 4

Static Module
interrupt
Reaction to CPU-STOP Substitute a value (SV) SV Dynamic Module
Keep last value (KLV)
Diagnostics
Wire break Yes/no
No Channel
No load voltage Yes/no
no Channel
L+/sensor supply Static group
Short circuit to M Yes/no
No
Short circuit to L+ Yes/no
No Channel
Channel
Substitute 1 Yes/no No Dynamic Channel
1 If you use the module in ER-1/ER-2, you must set this parameter to No because the interrupt lines are
not available in ER-1/ER-2.
2 Only in the CC (central controller) is it possible to start up the digital modules with the default settings.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-66 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

5.19.2 Behavior of the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A

Effect of Operating Mode and Supply Voltage on the Output Values


The output values of the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A depend on the
operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module.

Table 5-15 Dependence of the Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on
the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 422; DO 32  24 VDC/0.5 A

CPU Operating Mode Power Supply L+ Output Value of Digital


to Digital Module Module
POWER ON RUN L+ exists CPU value
L+ missing 0 signal
STOP L+ exists Substitute value/last value (0
signal preset)
L+ missing 0 signal
POWER L+ exists 0 signal
OFF L+ missing 0 signal

Behavior in the Event of Failure of the Supply Voltage


The failure of the supply voltage of the SM 422; DO 32  24VDC/0.5 A is always
indicated by the EXTF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made
available on the module (entry in diagnosis).
Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see
Section 5.19.1).

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-67
Digital Modules

5.20 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 8  120/230 VAC/5 A;


(6ES7 422-1FF00-0AA0)

Characteristics
The SM 422; DO 8  120/230 VAC/5 A has the following features:
8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1
Output current 5 A
120/230 VAC rated load voltage
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is
not inserted.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-68 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422;


DO 8  120/230 VAC/5 A

Process Module
1 INFT
2 EXTF
3 t
4 0
5 1L
6 F100
7 1N
8
9
10 1
11 2L
12 F200
13 2N
14
15 2

Data register and bus control


16 3L
17 F300
18 3N
19
20
21 3
22 4L
23 F400
24 4N
25
26
27 4
28 5L
29 F500
30 5N
31
32
33 5
34 6L
35 F600
36 6N
37
38
39 6
40 7L
41 F700
42 7N
43
44
LED control

45 7
46 8L
47 F800
48 8N

Figure 5-16 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 8  120/230 VAC/5 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-69
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 8  120/230 VAC/5 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator


Dimensions W  H  D 25  290  210 Output voltage
(in millimeters) At signal 1 At maximum current
Weight Approx. 800 g min. L1 (1.5 Vrms)
At maximum current
Data for Specific Module
min. L1 (10.7 Vrms)
Number of outputs 8
Output current
Length of cable
At signal 1
Unshielded 600 m
Rated value 5A
Shielded 1000 m
Permitted range 10 mA to 5 A
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Permitted surge current Max. 50 A per cycle
Rated load voltage L1 79 to 264 VAC
(per group)
Permitted frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
At signal 0 (leakage Max. 3.5 mA
Total current of the outputs current)
Horizontal installation With fan subassembly Output delay (for resistive load)
Up to 40 C Max. 16 A 24 A
From 0 to 1 Not more than 1 AC
Up to 60 C Max. 8 A 20 A scan cycle
Isolation At 1 to 0 Not more than 1 AC
Between channels and Yes scan cycle
backplane bus
Minimum load current 10 mA
Between the channels Yes Zero cross inhibit voltage Max. 55 V
In groups of 1 Size of the motor starter Max. size 5 to NEMA
Permitted potential difference Lamp load Max. 100 W

Between the outputs of the 500 VAC Parallel connection of 2


different groups outputs

Insulation tested with 1500 VAC For redundant triggering of Possible (only outputs
a load connected to the same
Current consumption load)
From the backplane bus Max. 250 mA
Triggering a digital input Possible
From load voltage L + Max. 1.5 mA
(without load) Switch rate

Power dissipation of the module Typ. 16 W For resistive load Max. 10 Hz

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics For inductive load Max. 0.5 Hz


to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13
Status display Green LED per channel
For lamp load 1 Hz
Interrupts None
Short-circuit protection of the Fuse, 8 A, 250 V (per
Diagnostic functions Parameters cannot be output output)
assigned
Min. current required for Min. 100 A
Group error display fuse to blow

For internal fault Red LED (INTF) Max. response time Max. 100 ms
failed fuse Replacement fuses Fuse, 8 A, quick-acting
For external fault Red LED (EXTF) Wickmann 194-1800-0
failed load voltage Schurter SP001.1013
Littelfuse 217.008

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-70 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Changing Fuses

Warning
! This can result in injury.
If you change a fuse without removing the front connector of the module, you
could be injured by an electric shock.
Consequently, always remove the front connector before you change the fuse.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-71
Digital Modules

5.21 Digital Output Module SM 422; DO 16  120/230 VAC/2 A;


(6ES7 422-1FH00-0AA0)

Characteristics
The SM 422; DO 16 120/230 VAC/2 A has the following features:
16 outputs, isolated in groups of 4
2 A output current
120/230 VAC rated load voltage
The status LEDs also indicate the system status even when the front connector is
not inserted.

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


5-72 A5E00069467-04
Digital Modules

Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422;


DO 16  120/230 VAC/2 A

Process Module

16 digital outputs (4 chassis grounds)


1 INTF
2 EXTF
Byte 0 3
4 0
5
6 1
7
8 2
9

Data register and bus control


10 3
11 1L
12 F1
13 1N
14
15 4
16
17 5
18
19 6
20
21 7
22 2L
23 F2
24 2N
25
Byte 1 26
27 0
28
29 1
30
31 2
32
33 3
34 3L
35 F3
36 3N
37
38
LED control

39 4
40
41 5
42
43 6
44
45 7
46 4L
47 F4
48 4N

Figure 5-17 Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 422; DO 16  120/230 VAC/2 A

S7-400, M7-400 Programmable Controlers Module Specifications


A5E00069467-04 5-73
Digital Modules

Technical Specifications of the SM 422; DO 16  120/230 VAC/2 A

Dimensions and Weight Data for Selecting an Actuator


DimensionsW  H  D 25  290  210 Output voltage
(in millimeters) At signal 1 At maximum current
Weight Approx. 800 g min. L1 (1.3 Vrms)

Data for Specific Module At minimum current


min. L1 (18.1 Vrms)
Number of outputs 16
Output current
Length of cable
At signal 1
Unshielded 600 m
Shielded 1000 m
Rated value 2A
Permitted range 10 mA to 2 A
Voltages, Currents, Potentials
Rated load voltage L1 79 to 264 VAC Permitted surge current Max. 50 A per cycle
(per group)
Permitted frequency range 47 to 63 Hz
At signal 0 (leakage Max. 2.6 mA
Total current of the outputs (per current)
group)
Output delay (for resistive load)
Horizontal installation With fan subassembly
Up to 40 C Max. 4 A 6A
From 0 to 1 Max. 1 ms

Up to 60 C Max. 2 A 5A At 1 to 0 Not more than 1 AC